Pc5500-6e Om&mm - 15044

Operation & Maintenance
Manual

HYDRAULIC MINING SHOVEL
6(5,$/180%(5
7KLVPDWHULDOLVSURSULHWDU\WR.RPDWVX0LQLQJ*HUPDQ\*PE+DQGLVQRWWREHUHSURGXFHGXVHG
RUGLVFORVHGH[FHSWLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKZULWWHQDXWKRUL]DWLRQIURP.RPDWVX0LQLQJ*HUPDQ\*PE+
,WLVRXUSROLF\WRLPSURYHRXUSURGXFWVZKHQHYHULWLVSRVVLEOHDQGSUDFWLFDOWRGRVR:HUHVHUYH
WKHULJKWWRPDNHFKDQJHVRUDGGLPSURYHPHQWVDWDQ\WLPHZLWKRXWLQFXUULQJDQ\REOLJDWLRQWRLQVWDOO
VXFKFKDQJHVRQSURGXFWVVROGSUHYLRXVO\
'XHWRWKLVFRQWLQXRVSURJUDPRIUHVHDUFKDQGGHYHORSPHQWSHULRGLFUHYLVLRQVPD\EHPDGHWRWKLV
SXEOLFDWLRQ,WLVUHFRPPHQGHGWKDWFXVWRPHUFRQWDFWWKHLUGLVWULEXWRUIRULQIRUPDWLRQRQWKHODWHVW
UHYLVLRQ
6HSW &RS\ULJKW
1. INTRODUCTION
3
1.1 CONTENTS OF THE BINDER INTRODUCTION
1.1 CONTENTS OF THE BINDER

Assembled in this file are the Operation-, Lubrication- and Mainte-
nance Manuals for your KOMATSU Hydraulic Mining Shovel.
4
INTRODUCTION 1.2 DIVISION OF THE BINDER
1.2 DIVISION OF THE BINDER

Part 1:
Operation Manual
Part 2:
Lubrication- and Maintenance Manual
Part 3:
Depending on the volume of Part 3 a second Binder "Volume 2" is
being delivered with the Shovel. This Binder contains the General
Assembly Procedure Manual for the Shovel, Specification Book-
let, Service Literature for the Power Unit (Diesel Engine or Elec-
tric Motor) and for Special Equipment. The Electrical- and
Hydraulic Diagrams are attached in the pocket of the front cover.
Refer to the "TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 2 BINDER"

for details.
Read the Manuals before You Start the Engines.
Before operating the machine, familiarize yourself with its instru-

ments and controls.
Observe the instructions in these manuals for:
● your Personal SAFETY
● Operating SAFETY, and
● READY and EFFICIENT PERFORMANCE of your

KOMATSU Hydraulic Mining Shovel.
Periodic preventive inspections and maintenance are the surest

means of keeping the machine in proper working order. Prompt
detection and correction of minor irregularities, and immediate
replacement of worn out or broken parts will prevent failures and
avoid expenses.
Replace damaged graphics and symbols.
Observe safety precautions to prevent injury and damage.
If you have any questions concerning this literature please con-

tact
Komatsu Mining Germany GmbH
Service Information
Department 8151.30
P.O. Box 18 03 61
D - 40570 Düsseldorf
GERMANY
5
1.3 DESIGNATED USE OF THE SHOVEL INTRODUCTION
1.3 DESIGNATED USE OF THE SHOVEL

This machine has been manufactured in accordance with
advanced and up-to-date technology standards including recog-
nized safety rules. Nevertheless, its use may constitute a risk to
life and limb of the user or of third parties, or cause damage to the
machine and to other material property.
The machine must only be used in technically perfect condition in

accordance with its designated use and the instructions set out in
the operation manual. Only trained safety-conscious operators
who are fully aware of the risks involved should operate the
machine. Any functional disorders, especially those affecting the
safety of the machine, should, therefore, be rectified immediately.
The hydraulic Shovel is designed exclusively for excavating, i.e.

excavation of bulk material and natural soil structure (e.g. earth,
clay, sand and stones ashore and off-shore). Observe local and
national safety regulations. Special conditions at the worksite
require additional safe working precautions, follow your com-
pany’s safety instructions. Short traveling distances for changing
the working site are considered as part of the designated use of
the Shovel.
Using the Shovel for purposes other than those mentioned above
(such as object handling and use as a transport vehicle) is consid-
ered contrary to its designated use. The manufacturer/supplier
cannot be held liable for any damage resulting from such use.
The risk of such misuse lies entirely with the user.
WARNING
Special use of the Shovel beyond its designated use, e.g.
object handling operations, require written agreement from
the manufacturer and retrofitment of the Shovel with respec-
tive safety related equipment before such special applica-
tions are permitted.
6
INTRODUCTION 1.4 DELIVERY OF THE SHOVEL
1.4 DELIVERY OF THE SHOVEL

The Shovel is being delivered disassembled into its main compo-
nents.
For assembling the Shovel refer to the separate Manual

”Assembly Procedure” in Volume 2 Binder.
WARNING
Personnel entrusted with work on the machine must have
read the Assembly Manual, the Operation,- Lubrication- and
Maintenance Manual and in particular the section on safety
before beginning work. Reading the instructions after work
has begun is too late.
If there are any questions concerning the assembling procedure,

contact your local Service Center.
Prior to first operation, inspect the Shovel thoroughly with the Ser-
vice Engineer responsible for the erection of the machine. Check
all fluid levels according to the Lubrication and Maintenance
Schedule.
Damages and defects caused by incorrect operation and mainte-

nance are not covered by the manufacturers guarantee.
NOTICE
If the Shovel is equipped with a fire suppression system,
make sure that the system is ready for operation.
SPARE PARTS
For your spare part orders refer to the Parts Catalogue.
In order to keep your Shovel in first-class operating condition use

only genuine spare and wear parts.
The use of any part other than the genuine part releases the
KOMATSU MINING GERMANY GmbH from any guarantee.
SERVICE
For all questions related to your Shovel please contact your local
Service Center.
In all your written or phoned inquiries please indicate the model

and serial number of your Shovel.
7
1.5 EXPLANATION OF ABBREVIATIONS INTRODUCTION
1.5 EXPLANATION OF ABBREVIATIONS
ABB. Definition
A Ampere
AC Alternating Current
API American Petroleum Institute
cSt Centistoke
°C Degree Celsius
CLS Central Lubrication System
DC Direct Current
DIN German Institute for Standardization
EBL Electronic Bucket Levelling System
ECM Electronic Control Module
ECS Electronic Control and Monitoring System
EF Earth Fault Protection Switch
FGPS Front Guard Protective Structure
FOPS Falling-Object Protective Structure
GL Gear Lubricant
h hours of operation
HPF High Pressure Filter (Hydraulic Oil)
HT High Tension
LED Light Emitting Diode
LT Low Tension
M1 Rear motor on counterweight side designated as motor 1
M2 Front motor on operator’s cab side designated as motor 2

MPG Multi-Purpose Grease
N Newton
Nm Newton meter
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
PM Planned Maintenance
ppm parts per million

PTO Power Take-Off (Pump Distributor Gear)
SLS Swing circle pinion Lubrication System
V Volt
1/min Revolutions Per Minute (RPM)
8
INTRODUCTION 1.6 TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.6 TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................... 3
1.1 CONTENTS OF THE BINDER ........................................................................................................... 4
1.2 DIVISION OF THE BINDER ............................................................................................................... 5
1.3 DESIGNATED USE OF THE SHOVEL .............................................................................................. 6
1.4 DELIVERY OF THE SHOVEL ............................................................................................................ 7
1.5 EXPLANATION OF ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................................................. 8
1.6 TABLE OF CONTENTS ..................................................................................................................... 9
2. SAFETY ...................................................................................................... 15
2.1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................................................................ 16
2.1.1 WARNINGS AND SYMBOLS .............................................................................................. 16
2.1.2 BASIC OPERATION AND DESIGNATED USE OF THE HYDRAULIC SHOVEL ............... 16
2.1.3 ORGANIZATIONAL MEASURES ....................................................................................... 17
2.1.4 SELECTION AND QUALIFICATION OF PERSONNEL - BASIC RESPONSIBILITIES ...... 19
2.1.5 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS GOVERNING SPECIFIC OPERATIONAL PHASES ................ 20
2.1.6 WARNING OF SPECIAL DANGERS .................................................................................. 23
2.1.7 TRANSPORTING AND TOWING -RECOMMISSIONING .................................................. 25
2.1.8 SPECIAL SAFETY EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................ 25
2.1.9 SAFETY HARNESS IN CONFORMITY WITH EN 361 (EUROPEAN STANDARD) ........... 29
3. OPERATION ............................................................................................... 37
3.1 FOREWORD .................................................................................................................................... 38
3.2 CONSTRUCTION OF THE SHOVEL ............................................................................................... 39

3.2.1 OVERALL VIEW .................................................................................................................. 39
3.2.2 UNDERCARRIAGE AND SUPERSTRUCTURE ................................................................. 40
3.2.3 UNDERCARRIAGE ............................................................................................................. 46
3.2.4 HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED ACCESS LADDER ........................................................... 48
3.2.5 EMERGENCY ESCAPE LADDER ...................................................................................... 52
3.2.6 EMERGENCY MOTOR SHUTDOWN FROM GROUND MAN OR OPERATOR WARNING
SYSTEM .............................................................................................................................. 54
3.2.7 OPERATOR’S CAB WITH INTEGRATED FALLING OBJECT PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE
(FOPS) ................................................................................................................................ 56
3.3 OPERATOR’S CAB - CONTROLS .................................................................................................. 66

3.3.1 CONTROLS WITH BACKHOE ATTACHMENT .................................................................. 66
3.3.2 CONTROLS WITH BOTTOM DUMP BUCKET ATTACHMENT ......................................... 70
9
1.6 TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION
3.3.3 OPERATOR’S CONSOLE ................................................................................................... 75

3.3.4 CONTROL UNITS FOR FIRE DETECTION, ACTUATION AND SUPPRESSION SYSTEM .
85
3.4 ELECTRONIC MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM ECS ...................................................... 86

3.4.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................. 87
3.4.2 OPERATING THE ELECTRONIC MONITORING SYSTEM ............................................... 95
3.4.3 AUTOMATIC DISPLAY OF MESSAGES ............................................................................ 99
3.4.4 MENU CONTROL AND SERVICE FUNCTIONS .............................................................. 123
3.4.5 MENU CONTROL LIST ..................................................................................................... 148
3.4.6 FAULT AND INFORMATION MESSAGE LIST ................................................................. 165
3.5 CAMERA SYSTEM WITH MONITOR ............................................................................................ 189

3.5.1 LOCATION OF MONITOR AND CONTROL UNIT ............................................................ 190
3.6 OPERATING THE HEATER, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING ..................................... 197
3.7 MACHINERY HOUSE .................................................................................................................... 199

3.7.1 EMERGENCY MOTOR SHUTDOWN SWITCHES ........................................................... 200
3.7.2 SAFETY SWITCH FOR MAINTENANCE .......................................................................... 202
3.7.3 CONTROL AND FILTER PANEL OF REAR- AND FRONT POWER UNIT ...................... 204
3.8 MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCH CABINET IN CAB BASE .............................................................. 205

3.8.1 COMPONENTS OF THE MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCH CABINET ................................. 206
3.8.2 SWITCH BOARD (X2) IN CAB BASE ............................................................................... 208
3.8.3 MONITOR AND CONTROL PANEL IN CAB BASE .......................................................... 222
3.8.4 SWITCH BOARD - MEDIUM VOLTAGE ........................................................................... 224
3.9 HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCH CABINET ............................................................................................ 225
3.10 CHECKS BEFORE STARTING THE MAIN DRIVE MOTORS ...................................................... 227
3.11 STARTING THE MAIN DRIVE MOTORS ...................................................................................... 231
3.12 MOVING THE SHOVEL ................................................................................................................. 238

3.12.1 TRAVEL CONTROL WITH FOOT PEDALS ...................................................................... 238
3.12.2 TRAVELLING INSTRUCTIONS ........................................................................................ 241
3.13 SLEWING AND BRAKING THE SUPERSTRUCTURE ................................................................. 242

3.13.1 SLEWING THE SUPERSTRUCTURE .............................................................................. 242
3.14 WORKING WITH THE ATTACHMENT .......................................................................................... 245

3.14.1 MACHINES EQUIPPED WITH ”EURO” CONTROL SYSTEM .......................................... 245
3.14.2 MACHINES EQUIPPED WITH ”KMG” CONTROL SYSTEM ............................................ 246
3.14.3 BOTTOM DUMP BUCKET ................................................................................................ 247
3.14.4 DROP BALL OPERATION ................................................................................................ 248
3.14.5 COMBINED OPERATION CYCLES .................................................................................. 251
3.15 WORKING INSTRUCTIONS .......................................................................................................... 253

3.15.1 STABILITY OF THE SHOVEL ........................................................................................... 253
3.15.2 SHOVEL OPERATION ...................................................................................................... 253
10
3.16 PARKING THE SHOVEL ............................................................................................................... 256
3.17 STOPPING THE MAIN DRIVE MOTORS ...................................................................................... 257

3.17.1 RELIEVE PRESSURE IN THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM .................................................... 260
3.18 OPERATION OF THE LUBRICATION SYSTEM ........................................................................... 261

3.18.1 CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM -CLS- FOR SUPERSTRUCTURE AND ATTACHMENT
261
3.18.2 SWING CIRCLE PINION LUBRICATION SYSTEM ”SLS” ............................................... 263
3.19 FIRE DETECTION, ACTUATION AND SUPPRESSION SYSTEM ............................................... 265

3.19.1 CONTROL UNITS FOR THE FIRE DETECTION, ACTUATION AND SUPPRESSION
SYSTEMS ......................................................................................................................... 266
3.19.2 REMOTE HIGH LEVEL ALARM *FIRE* LOCATED ON THE CAB .................................. 270
3.19.3 ACTUATION MODES OF THE FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM: .................................... 270
3.19.4 IN CASE OF FIRE ............................................................................................................. 272
3.20 TRANSFER PUMP FOR HYDRAULIC OIL ................................................................................... 273

3.20.1 OPERATING THE TRANSFER PUMP ............................................................................. 274
3.20.2 FUNCTIONS OF THE TRANSFER PUMP ....................................................................... 276
3.21 CENTRAL REFILLING SYSTEM ................................................................................................... 279

3.21.1 SYSTEMS CONNECTED TO THE REFILLING SYSTEM ................................................ 280
3.21.2 REFILLABLE GREASE CONTAINERS OF THE AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS ...
284
3.22 SERVICE CRANE (SPECIAL EQUIPMENT) ................................................................................. 285

3.22.1 OPERATING THE CRANE ............................................................................................... 286
3.23 WORK ON THE LOADER ATTACHMENT .................................................................................... 289
3.24 TRANSPORTATION AND LIFTING OF THE

SHOVEL ......................................................................................................................................... 290
3.24.1 DISASSEMBLING OF THE SHOVEL ............................................................................... 290
3.24.2 TRANSPORTATION AND LIFTING .................................................................................. 290
3.25 RETRIEVAL PROCEDURE ........................................................................................................... 291
3.26 SHOVEL STORAGE ...................................................................................................................... 292

3.26.1 PREPARING FOR STORAGE .......................................................................................... 292
3.26.2 ONE MONTH REPETITIVE SERVICE PERIOD ............................................................... 292
3.26.3 SIX MONTH REPETITIVE SERVICE PERIOD ................................................................. 293
3.26.4 PREPARING FOR OPERATION ...................................................................................... 293
3.27 TROUBLE SHOOTING .................................................................................................................. 294

3.27.1 MAIN DRIVE ELECTRIC MOTOR .................................................................................... 294
3.27.2 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM ...................................................................................................... 295
3.27.3 FINAL DRIVES AND SWING GEAR ................................................................................. 296
3.27.4 CRAWLER TRACKS ......................................................................................................... 296
11
4. MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................ 297

4.1 FOREWORD .................................................................................................................................. 298
4.2 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................... 299
4.3 FUEL AND LUBRICANTS ............................................................................................................. 301
4.4 FILLING CAPACITIES ................................................................................................................... 305
4.5 STANDARD TORQUE LIST .......................................................................................................... 306
4.6 LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ...................................................................... 307

4.6.1 INITIAL SERVICING .......................................................................................................... 307
4.6.2 PERIODIC SERVICING INTERVALS ............................................................................... 307
4.6.3 PERIODIC SERVICING SCHEDULE ................................................................................ 308
4.6.4 MAINTENANCE OF THE MAIN DRIVE MOTORS ........................................................... 311
4.7 WHEN NECESSARY ..................................................................................................................... 314

4.7.1 SWING CIRCLE TOOTHING LUBRICATION ................................................................... 315
4.7.2 AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS FILL GREASE CONTAINERS ......................... 317
4.7.3 TRACK ROLLERS AND GUIDE WHEELS - REPLACE FLOATING SEALS .................... 321
4.8 EVERY 10 OPERATING HOURS OR DAILY ................................................................................ 322

4.8.1 WALK - AROUND INSPECTION ....................................................................................... 323
4.8.2 TRACK GROUPS - CLEAN ............................................................................................... 333
4.9 EVERY 50 OPERATING HOURS OR WEEKLY ........................................................................... 334

4.9.1 SWING GEARS AND MOTOR ADAPTER HOUSINGS - CHECK OIL LEVELS .............. 335
4.9.2 TRAVEL GEARS, MOTOR ADAPTER HOUSINGS AND FINAL DRIVES CHECK OIL
LEVELS ............................................................................................................................. 339
4.9.3 PTO’s (PUMP DISTRIBUTOR GEARS) AND OIL RESERVOIR - CHECK OIL LEVEL ... 345
4.9.4 HYDRAULIC ACCESS LADDER - CHECK SAFETY SENSOR ....................................... 349
4.9.5 HYDRAULIC OIL COOLERS - INSPECT AND CLEAN IF NECESSARY ......................... 351
4.10 EVERY 250 OPERATING HOURS OR MONTHLY ....................................................................... 352

4.10.1 SIGNAL HORN COMPRESSOR - LUBRICATE ............................................................... 353
4.10.2 HYDRAULIC OIL COOLER FAN BEARINGS - CHECK FOR LEAKAGE AND CLEAN
BREATHER FILTER .......................................................................................................... 353
4.10.3 RADIATOR FAN BEARINGS - CHECK FOR LEAKAGE AND CLEAN BREATHER FILTER
(DIESEL VERSION ONLY) ............................................................................................... 353
4.10.4 AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS - CLEAN IN-LINE GREASE FILTER AND CHECK
BREATHER FILTER .......................................................................................................... 355
4.10.5 CAB AIR CLEANER - CLEAN OR REPLACE FILTER ELEMENT ................................... 357
4.10.6 AIR CONDITIONING FOR OPERATOR’S CAB AND SWITCH CABINETS ..................... 359
4.10.7 WINDSHIELD WASHER SYSTEM - CHECK FLUID LEVEL ............................................ 363
4.11 EVERY 500 OPERATING HOURS OR QUARTERLY .................................................................. 364

4.11.1 BATTERIES - CHECK FLUID LEVEL ............................................................................... 365
4.11.2 CRAWLER TRACK - INSPECTION .................................................................................. 367
12
4.12 EVERY 1000 OPERATING HOURS OR EVERY 6 MONTH ......................................................... 372

4.12.1 HIGH STRENGTH BOLT CONNECTIONS - CHECK TORQUE LOAD ............................ 373
4.12.2 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM - FILTER SERVICE ..................................................................... 429
4.12.3 PTO’S (PUMP DISTRIBUTOR GEARS), SWING GEARS AND TRAVEL GEARS - OIL
SAMPLE ANALYSIS ......................................................................................................... 443
4.12.4 SIGNAL HORN COMPRESSOR - CLEAN AND LUBRICATE .......................................... 445
4.12.5 HYDRAULIC TRACK TENSIONING SYSTEM - CHECK PRESSURE ACCUMULATORS ....
447
4.12.6 WATER FILTER - REPLACE FILTER CARTRIDGE ........................................................ 449
4.12.7 HYDRAULIC OIL COOLER - INSPECT AND LUBRICATE DOOR HINGES .................... 451
4.12.8 MACHINERY HOUSE DOORS - INSPECT AND LUBRICATE DOOR HINGES .............. 453
4.12.9 SLIP RING UNIT - LUBRICATE ........................................................................................ 455
4.13 EVERY 2000 OPERATING HOURS OR YEARLY ........................................................................ 456

4.13.1 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM - CHANGE OIL, REPLACE SUCTION STRAINERS AND
PULSATION DAMPER ...................................................................................................... 457
4.13.2 EMERGENCY ESCAPE LADDER - INSPECTION ........................................................... 469
4.14 EVERY 3000 OPERATING HOURS HOWEVER AT LEAST ONCE A YEAR .............................. 470
4.14.1 SWING GEARS AND MOTOR ADAPTER HOUSING - CHANGE OIL ............................. 471
4.14.2 TRAVEL GEARS, MOTOR ADAPTER HOUSINGS AND FINAL DRIVES CHANGE OIL 479
4.14.3 PTO (PUMP DISTRIBUTOR GEAR) - CHANGE OIL ....................................................... 483
4.15 FIRE PREVENTION ....................................................................................................................... 486
4.16 WELD REPAIRS ............................................................................................................................ 488

4.16.1 PROTECTIVE MEASURES BEFORE STARTING WELD REPAIRS ON THE
UNDERCARRIAGE ........................................................................................................... 491
4.16.2 PROTECTIVE MEASURES BEFORE STARTING WELD REPAIRS ON THE LOADER
ATTACHMENT .................................................................................................................. 493
SUPERSTRUCTURE ........................................................................................................ 495
4.16.4 AFTER FINISHING THE REPAIR WELDINGS ON THE SUPERSTRUCTURE ............... 495
13
14
2. SAFETY
15
2.1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAFETY
2.1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
2.1.1 WARNINGS AND SYMBOLS

The following signs and designations are used in the manual to
designate in-structions of particular importance.
WARNING
Refers to orders and prohibitions designed to prevent injury
or extensive damage.
CAUTION
Refers to special information and/or orders and prohibitions
directed towards preventing damage.
NOTICE
Refers to special information on how to use the machine
most efficiently.
2.1.2 BASIC OPERATION AND DESIGNATED USE OF THE HYDRAULIC

SHOVEL
Refer to "DESIGNATED USE OF THE SHOVEL" on page 6
for details.
WARNING
The use of the Shovel for object handling operations without
the respective safety related equipment is not allowed.
16
SAFETY 2.1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
2.1.3 ORGANIZATIONAL MEASURES

● The Operation,- Lubrication and Maintenance Manual must
always be at hand at the place of use of the machine, e. g. by
stowing them in the box provided for such purpose.
● In addition to the Operation,- Lubrication and Maintenance

Manual, observe and instruct the user in all other generally
applicable legal and other mandatory regulations relevant to
accident prevention and environmental protection.
These compulsory regulations may also deal with the han-
dling of hazardous substances, issuing and/or wearing of per-
sonal protective equipment, or traffic regulations.
● The Operation,- Lubrication and Maintenance Manual must

be supplemented by instructions covering the duties involved
in supervising and notifying special organizational features,
such as job organization, working sequences or the person-
nel entrusted with the work.
● Personnel entrusted with work on the machine must have

read the Operation,- Lubrication and Maintenance Manual
and in particular the chapter on safety before beginning work.
Reading the instructions after work has begun is too late. This
applies especially to persons working only occasionally on
the machine, e. g. during setting up or maintenance.
● Check - at least from time to time - whether the personnel is

carrying out the work in compliance with the Operation,-
Lubrication and Maintenance Manual and paying attention to
risks and safety factors.
● For reasons of security, long hair must be tied back or other-

wise secured, garments must be close-fitting and no jewellery
- such as rings - may be worn. Injury may result from being
caught up in the machinery or from rings catching on moving
parts.
● Use protective equipment wherever required by the circum-

stances or by law.
● Observe all safety instructions and warnings attached to the

machine.
● See to it that safety instructions and warnings attached to the

machine are always complete and perfectly legible.
● In the event of safety-relevant modifications or changes in the

behaviour of the machine during operation, stop the machine
immediately and report the malfunction to the competent
authority/person.
● Never make any modifications, additions or conversions

which might affect safety without the supplier’s approval. This
also applies to the installation and adjustment of safety
devices and valves as well as to welding work on load-bear-
ing elements.
● Spare parts must comply with the technical requirements

specified by the manufacturer. Spare parts from original
equipment manufacturers can be relied to do so.
17
● Replace hydraulic hoses within stipulated and appropriate

intervals even if no safety-relevant defects have been
detected.
● Adhere to prescribed intervals or those specified in the Oper-

ation,- Lubrication and Maintenance Manual for routine
checks and inspections.
● For the execution of maintenance work, tools and workshop

equipment adapted to the task on hand are absolutely indis-
pensable.
● The personnel must be familiar with the location and opera-

tion of fire extinguishers.
● Observe all fire-warning and fire-fighting procedures.
18
2.1.4 SELECTION AND QUALIFICATION OF PERSONNEL -

BASIC RESPONSIBILITIES
● Any work on and with the machine must be executed by reli-
able personnel only. Statutory minimum age limits must be
observed.
● Employ only trained or instructed staff and set out clearly the
individual responsibilities of the personnel for operation, set-
up, maintenance and repair.
● Make sure that only authorized personnel works on or with

the machine.
● Define the machine operator’s responsibilities - also with

regard to observing traffic regulations - giving the operator the
authority to refuse instructions by third parties that are con-
trary to safety.
● Do not allow persons to be trained or instructed or persons

taking part in a general training course to work on or with the
machine without being permanently supervised by an experi-
enced person.
● Work on the electrical system and equipment of the machine

must be carried out only by a skilled electrician or by
instructed persons under the supervision and guidance of a
skilled electrician and in accordance with electrical engineer-
ing rules and regulations.
● Work on chassis, brake and steering systems must be per-

formed by skilled personnel only which has been specially
trained for such work.
● Work on the hydraulic system must be carried out only by

personnel with special knowledge and experience of hydrau-
lic equipment.
19
2.1.5 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS GOVERNING SPECIFIC OPERATIONAL

PHASES
STANDARD OPERATION
● Avoid any operational mode that might be prejudicial to

safety.
● Before beginning work, familiarize yourself with the surround-

ings and circumstances of the site, such as obstacles in the
working and travelling area, the soil bearing capacity and any
barriers separating the construction site from public roads.
● Take the necessary precautions to ensure that the machine is

used only when in a safe and reliable state.
Operate the machine only if all protective and safety-oriented
devices, such as re- movable safety devices, emergency
shut-off equipment, sound-proofing elements and exhaust-
ers, are in place and fully functional.
● Check the machine at least once per working shift for obvious
damage and defects. Report any changes (incl. changes in
the machine’s working behaviour) to the competent organiza-
tion/person immediately. If necessary, stop the machine
immediately and lock it.
● In the event of malfunctions, stop the machine immediately

and lock it. Have any defects rectified immediately.
● Start the machine from the driver’s seat only.
● During start-up and shut-down procedures always watch the

indicators in accordance with the Operation,- Lubrication and
Maintenance Manual.
● Before starting up or setting the machine in motion, make

sure that nobody is at risk.
● Before starting work or travelling with the machine, check that

the braking, steering, signalling and lighting systems are fully
functional.
● Before setting the machine in motion always check that the

accessories have been safely stowed away.
● When travelling on public roads, ways and places always

observe the valid traffic regulations and, if necessary, make
sure beforehand that the machine is in a condition compatible
with these regulations.
● In conditions of poor visibility and after dark always switch on

the lighting system.
● Persons accompanying the driver must be seated on the pas-

senger seat provided for this purpose.
● When crossing underpasses, bridges and tunnels or when

passing under overhead lines always make sure that there is
sufficient clearance.
20
● Always keep at a distance from the edges of building pits and

slopes.
● Avoid any operation that might be a risk to machine stability.
● Never travel across slopes; always keep the working equip-

ment and the load close to the ground, especially when trav-
elling downhill.
● On sloping terrain always adapt your travelling speed to the

prevailing ground conditions. Never change to a lower gear
on a slope but always before reaching it.
● Before leaving the driver’s seat always secure the machine

against inadvertent movement and unauthorized use.
SPECIAL WORK IN CONJUNCTION WITH UTILIZA-

TION OF THE MACHINE AND MAINTENANCE AND
REPAIRS DURING OPERATION; DISPOSAL OF
PARTS AND CONSUMABLES
● Observe the adjusting, maintenance and inspection activities

and intervals set out in the Operation,- Lubrication and Main-
tenance Manual, including information on the replacement of
parts and equipment. These activities may be executed by
skilled personnel only.
● Brief operating personnel before beginning special operations

and maintenance work, and appoint a person to supervise the
activities.
● In any work concerning the operation, conversion or adjust-

ment of the machine and its safety-oriented devices or any
work related to maintenance, inspection and repair, always
observe the start-up and shut-down procedures set out in the
Operation,- Lubrication and Maintenance Manual and the
information on maintenance work.
● Ensure that the maintenance area is adequately secured.
● If the machine is completely shut down for maintenance and

repair work, it must be secured against inadvertent starting
by:
❍ locking the principal control elements and removing the

ignition key and/or
❍ attaching a warning sign to the main switch
● Carry out maintenance and repair work only if the machine is

positioned on stable and level ground and has been secured
against inadvertent movement and buckling.
● To avoid the risk of accidents, individual parts and large

assemblies being moved for replacement purposes should be
carefully attached to lifting tackle and secured. Use only suit-
able and technically perfect lifting gear and suspension sys-
tems with adequate lifting capacity. Never work or stand
under suspended loads.
21
● The fastening of loads and the instructing of crane operators

should be entrusted to experienced persons only. The mar-
shaller giving the instructions must be within sight or sound of
the operator.
● For carrying out overhead assembly work always use spe-

cially designed or otherwise safety-oriented ladders and
working platforms. Never use machine parts as a climbing
aid. Wear a safety harness when carrying out maintenance
work at greater heights.
Keep all handles, steps, handrails, platforms, landings and
ladders free from dirt, snow and ice.
● Clean the machine, especially connections and threaded

unions, of any traces of oil, fuel or preservatives before carry-
ing out maintenance/repair. Never use aggressive detergents.
Use lint-free cleaning rags.
● Before cleaning the machine with water, steam jet (high-pres-

sure cleaning) or detergents, cover or tape up all openings
which - for safety and functional reasons - must be protected
against water, steam or detergent penetration. Special care
must be taken with electric motors and switchgear cabinets.
● Ensure during cleaning of the machine that the temperature

sensors of the fire-warning and fire-fighting systems do not
come into contact with hot cleaning agents as this might acti-
vate the fire-fighting system.
● After cleaning, remove all covers and tapes applied for that
purpose.
● After cleaning, examine all fuel, lubricant, and hydraulic fluid

lines for leaks, loose connections, chafe marks and damage.
Any defects found must be rectified without delay.
● Always tighten any screwed connections that have been loos-

ened during maintenance and repair.
● Any safety devices removed for set-up, maintenance or repair

purposes must be refitted and checked immediately upon
completion of the maintenance and repair work.
● Ensure that all consumables and replaced parts are disposed

of safely and with minimum environmental impact.
22
2.1.6 WARNING OF SPECIAL DANGERS
ELECTRIC ENERGY
● Use only original fuses and circuit breakers with the specified
current rating. Switch off the machine immediately if trouble
occurs in the electrical system.
● When working with the machine , maintain a safe distance

from overhead electric lines. If work is to be carried out close
to overhead lines, the working equipment must be kept well
away from them. Caution, danger! Check out the prescribed
safety distances.
● If your machine comes into contact with a live wire
❍ do not leave the machine
❍ drive the machine out of the hazard zone
❍ warn others against approaching and touching the

machine
❍ have the live wire de-energized
❍ do not leave the machine until the damaged line has

been safely de-energized.
● Work on the electrical system or equipment may only be car-

ried out by a skilled electrician himself or by specially
instructed personnel under the control and supervision of
such electrician and in accordance with the applicable electri-
cal engineering rules.
● If provided for in the regulations, the power supply to parts of

machine, on which inspection, maintenance and repair work
is to be carried out must be cut off.
Before starting any work, check the de-energized parts for the
presence of power and ground or short-circuit them in addi-
tion to insulating adjacent live parts and elements.
● The electrical equipment of the machine is to be inspected

and checked at regular intervals. Defects such as loose con-
nections or scorched cables must be rectified immediately.
● Necessary work on live parts and elements must be carried

out only in the presence of a second person who can cut off
the power supply in case of danger by actuating the emer-
gency shut-off or main power switch. Secure the working area
with a red-and-white safety chain and a warning sign. Use
insulated tools only.
● Before starting work on high-voltage assemblies and after

cutting out the power supply, the feeder cable must be
grounded and components such as capacitors short-circuited
with a grounding rod.
23
GAS, DUST, STEAM AND SMOKE
● Operate internal combustion engines and fuel operated heat-

ing systems only on adequately ventilated premises. Before
starting the machine on enclosed premises, make sure that
there is sufficient ventilation.
Observe the regulations in force at the respective site.
● Carry out welding, flame-cutting and grinding work on the

machine only if this has been expressly authorized, as there
may be a risk of explosion and fire.
● Special care must be taken before welding, flame-cutting and

grinding operations are carried out on the counterweight. The
filling of the counterweight chambers can create explosive
gases which will accumulate in the chambers of the counter-
weight. These gases must be expelled before welding, flame-
cutting and grinding operations are carried out on the coun-
terweight. Danger of explosion.
Follow the instructions given in PARTS & SERVICE NEWS
No. AH04518 for expelling the gases from the counterweight
chambers.
● Before carrying out welding, flame-cutting and grinding oper-

ations, clean the machine and its surroundings from dust and
other inflammable substances and make sure that the pre-
mises are adequately ventilated (risk of explosion).
HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC EQUIPMENT
● Work on hydraulic equipment may be carried out only by per-

sons having special knowledge and experience in hydraulic
systems.
● Check all lines, hoses and screwed connections regularly for

leaks and obvious damage. Repair damage immediately.
Splashed oil may cause injury and fire.
● Depressurize all system sections and pressure pipes

(hydraulic system, compressed-air system) to be removed in
accordance with the specific instructions for the unit con-
cerned before carrying out any repair work.
● Hydraulic and compressed-air lines must be laid and fitted

properly. Ensure that no connections are interchanged. The
fittings, lengths and quality of the hoses must comply with the
technical requirements.
NOISE
● During operation, all sound baffles must be closed.
● Always wear the prescribed ear protectors.
24
OIL, GREASE AND OTHER CHEMICAL

SUBSTANCES
● When handling oil, grease and other chemical substances,

observe the product-related safety regulations.
● Be careful when handling hot consumables (risk of burning or

scalding).
2.1.7 TRANSPORTING AND TOWING -RECOMMISSIONING

● The machine must be towed, loaded and transported only in
accordance with the Operation,- Lubrication and Maintenance
Manual.
● For towing the machine observe the prescribed transport

position, admissible speed and itinerary.
● Use only appropriate means of transport and lifting gear of

adequate capacity.
● The recommissioning procedure must be strictly in accor-

dance with the Operation,- Lubrication and Maintenance
Manual.
2.1.8 SPECIAL SAFETY EQUIPMENT
SAFETY HARNESS IN CONFORMITY WITH EN 361

(EUROPEAN STANDARD)
The safety harness should only be used together with connectors

according to
EN 354, and fall arrest according to EN 355, or fall protection
devices according to EN 360.
Refer to page page 29 in this section for more informa-

tion.
25
FALLING-OBJECT PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE

”FOPS” FOR OPERATOR’S CAB.
The Shovel must be equipped with a falling object protective

structure ”FOPS” if it is used for applications where there is a risk
of falling material.
The ”FOPS” structure shall comply with EN 474.
FRONT GUARD PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE

”FGPS” FOR OPERATOR’S CAB
The Shovel must be equipped with a front guard protective struc-

ture ”FGPS” if it is used for applications where there is a risk of
hitting objects from the front.
OBJECT HANDLING
Object handling operations are not allowed. If the Shovel is used

for object handling applications it must be equipped with the
respective safety devices.
LIGHTING
The Shovel must only be operated when the operator has suffi-
cient visibility in relation to the work area.
Disturbing shady areas or dazzling effects must be avoided.
If necessary, the Shovel must be retrofitted with lighting equip-

ment (working lights) in order to ensure sufficient visibility condi-
tions.
WARNING BEACON
The Shovel can be retrofitted with a warning beacon which is fit-

ted on the cab roof by means of a magnetic bracket.
NOTICE
The above-mentioned special safety devices can be ordered
as accessories together with the Shovel.
They are also available as a field package for installation
through our service organization.
26
This page left intentionally blank
27
28
2.1.9 SAFETY HARNESS IN CONFORMITY WITH EN 361

(EUROPEAN STANDARD)
WARNING
Always use the Safety Harness (1) in conjunction with strap
type Fall Absorber (2), illust. (Z 20885) before mounting onto
the loader attachment or other unsecured places of the
Shovel.
NOTICE
● The Safety Harness is located in the Cabinet of the Oper-
ator’s Cab.
● The illustration (Z 20885) shows a typical use of the

safety harness in connection with the strap type fall
absorber.
Legend for illustration Z 20885
(1) Safety Harness according to EN 361
(2) Strap-Type Fall Absorber according to DIN EN 355
(3) Ladder to cab roof and railings (attachment points)
(4) Protection hoods for roof mounted air conditioning, if

so equipped
(A) Shoulder Strap
(B) Back Plate
(C) Catching Hook
(D) Shoulder-Strap Fixing
(E) Belly Strap
(F) Holding Hook
(G) Hold-Back Hook
(H) Pelvis Strap
(J) Leg Strap
29
30
INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
Open the lock, lift the harness by the catch hook (C), the blue
straps (leg straps J) are below. The harness is being put on just
like a jacket. Pull the belly strap (E) through the lock, as shown on
the illustration, and secure it.
By closing the breast strap, you avoid the shoulder straps to side-
slip. Bring the leg straps (J) around the legs to the front, pull them
in, as shown in the illustration, and tighten them. Adapt the har-
ness to body form, seeing to perfect fit, in particular that the
catching hook (C) be in the center of the back.
The safety harness should belong to its wearer personally.
The safety harness should only be used together with connectors

acc. to EN 354, and fall arrest acc. to EN 355, or fall protection
devices acc. to EN 360.
The attachment point for the safety harness should be above the
wearer, and the carrying capacity of the attachment point should
be sufficient to correspond with the minimum carrying capacity
acc. to EN 795.
31
32
PRIOR TO USING THE HARNESS (1), THE

WEARER SHALL
● Carry out a visual check of the system or component; correct

functioning and perfect working order have to be assured.
● Make sure that the recommendations for use with other com-
ponents of the system be observed in conformity with the
instructions for use.
The system or component must no longer be used, if there are

any doubts in respect
of its safe condition. The equipment has to be inspected by the

manufacturer or by a qualified person.
It is essential for safety reasons that a fall protection system or

system component
which has already been subjected to fall be removed from service

and sent back to the manufacturer or an authorized qualified
repair shop for maintenance and renewed testing.
Fall protection systems have to be treated with care and to be

kept clean and ready for use. It has to be warned against bringing
the systems into contact with acids or other caustic liquids and
gases, oils, detergents, or sharp-edged objects.
Should the harness have become wet during use or cleaning, do

not dry near a fire or other sources of heat, but rather in a natural
way in not too warm rooms. Keep the harness freely suspended
or loosely rolled up.
When using the fall protection systems, the pertaining safety reg-
ulations in force and the "Rules for Use of Personal Fall Arrest
Systems" have to be observed for protection against danger.
At least every 12 months, the safety harness and its components

have to be inspected by a competent person authorized by the
manufacturer and maintained, if the manufacturer considers it
necessary.
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR USE OF THE HOLDING

HOOKS AND HOLD-BACK HOOKS OF THE
SAFETY HARNESS (1),
During the holding function, the connectors may only be placed

around a mast or other construction between the two holding
hooks, so that free fall is limited to max.0.5 m.
It should be strictly seen to it that the connector be not slung

around constructions with too small diameter or sharp edges.
With the lateral holding hooks, work may only be carried out on
horizontal or almost horizontal surfaces (roofs). The connectors
have to be adjusted in such a way that the area, where danger of
falling down prevails, cannot be reached.
33
34
INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
Strap-Type Fall Absorber acc. to DIN EN 355 (Type E.K.N.-BFD)
Use
Within a fall-arrest system, the strap-type fall absorber (2) has to

be used in conjunction with a safety harness (1) acc. to DIN EN
361. The maximum length including the safety rope must not
exceed 2.0 m. For longer ropes, a rope-shortening device has to
be applied in addition.
Fix the rope to the attachment point and attach the strap-type fall
absorber to the catching hook in the back of the safety harness.
The attachment point should be above the wearer and its mini-
mum carrying capacity should be 10 KN, acc. to DIN EN 795.
The strap-type fall absorber and the safety rope must not be dam-
aged, e.g. never pull
them over sharp edges nor get them burnt by welding sparks.
Storing and maintenance
The strap-type fall absorber has to be kept dry in an airy and

shady room. It must not be ex-posed to acids, caustic chemicals,
nor to an aggressive atmosphere, and contact with oils has to be
avoided. If the strap-type fall absorber is dirty, it may be cleaned
with a little water and a light-duty detergent. Dry it in a shady
place (nowhere near fire or other sources of heat). Protect it from
sharp-edged objects.
Inspection
Prior to use, all parts have to be inspected for safe condition and
damages. At least once a year, the strap-type fall absorber has to
be tested by a competent person. A damaged or used strap-type
fall absorber has to be removed from service immediately. The
strap-type fall absorber must not be changed in any way. Repair
work has to be done by the
35
36
3. OPERATION
37
3.1 FOREWORD OPERATION
3.1 FOREWORD
This Operation Manual contains the instructions for correct opera-
tion of your KOMATSU Mining Shovel. It should always be ready
for use in the Operator’s cab.
WARNING
The information in this manual does not replace any safety
rules or laws used in your area.
Special safety regulations are given in the rules for the prevention
of accidents. It is your responsibility to observe these rules.
Carefully read the Safety Instructions → See "SAFETY"

on page 15.
Before operating the machine, familiarize yourself with its instru-

ments and controls.
Observe the instructions in this manual for:
● your Personal SAFETY
● Operating SAFETY, and
● READY and EFFICIENT PERFORMANCE of your

KOMATSU Mining Shovel.
WARNING
Improper operation of this machine can cause injury or
death.
NOTICE
Optional equipment and accessories are available. Disregard
the instructions for equipment not on your Shovel.
38
OPERATION 3.2 CONSTRUCTION OF THE SHOVEL
3.2 CONSTRUCTION OF THE SHOVEL
3.2.1 OVERALL VIEW
(1) Undercarriage (6) Stick

(2) Cable drum (7) Bottom dump bucket
(3) Superstructure (8) Bucket cylinders
(4) Automatic lubrication systems (9) Boom cylinders
(5) Boom (10) Stick cylinders
39
3.2 CONSTRUCTION OF THE SHOVEL OPERATION
3.2.2 UNDERCARRIAGE AND SUPERSTRUCTURE
40
(1) Final drive

(2) Crawler carrier
(3) Track roller
(4) Carrier roller
(5) Guide wheel
(6) Swing circle guard
(7) Hydraulically operated access ladder, see page 48

for more information
(8) Battery main switches
(9) Control switch for access ladder
(10) Monitor box for central refilling system, see

page 276 for more information
(11) Push button for emergency shut down of both main
drive motors.
DO NOT use the emergency shut down button for
normal stopping procedure.
(12) Sliding window of operator’s cab, see page 56 for

more information
(13) Emergency escape ladder, see page 48 for more

information
(14) Air conditioner unit for high voltage switch cabinet
(15) Hydraulically driven grease pump of the Swing circle

pinion Lubrication System (SLS)
(16) Hydraulically driven grease pump of the Central

Lubrication System (CLS)
41
SUPERSTRUCTURE - TOP VIEW
42
Legend for illustration Z22386a
(1) Operator’s cab with integrated FOPS, see page 56 for more information
(2) Cable drum
(3) Not used

(4) Cab base, contains the middle and low voltage electrical equipment
(5) Swing circle
(6) High voltage switch cabinet

(7) Hydraulically operated access ladder, see page 48 for more information
(8) Counterweight
WARNING
The chambers of the counterweight are filled with a mixture of concrete, granu-
lated ore and steel pellets. This mixture can create explosive gases which will
accumulate in the chambers of the counterweight. Before any welding, flame-cut-
ting, grinding or drilling procedures are carried out on the counterweight it is
vital to expel these gases from the counterweight chambers. Failure to properly
expel the gases from the counterweight chambers can result in an explosion with
serious personal injury or death.
Follow the instructions given in PARTS & SERVICE NEWS No. AH04518 for expel-
ling the gases from the counterweight chambers.
(9) Hydraulic oil cooler with hydraulically driven fans
(10) Main hydraulic oil reservoir
(11) Batteries
(12) Swing gears
(13) Hydraulically driven grease pump of the Swing circle pinion Lubrication System (SLS
(14) Hydraulically driven grease pump of the Central Lubrication System (CLS))
(15) Main control valves with high pressure in-line filters

(16) Main drive electric motor 1. Refer to the separate User’s Manual >DRIVE INDUCTION
MOTORS AND GENERATORS< filed in Service Literature binder volume 2 for all oper-
ation and maintenance instructions.
(17) Flexible coupling, rear
(18) Rear PTO 1

(19) Main hydraulic pumps 1, 2 and 3
(20) Capacitor motor 1
(21) Main drive electric motor 2
(22) Flexible coupling, front
(23) Front PTO 2
(24) Main hydraulic pumps 4, 5 and 6

(25) Capacitor motor 2
43
MACHINERY HOUSE
44
Legend for illustration Z22390a
Machinery house
A View from rear side without counterweight
B View from right side
C Top view
(1) Motor cooling air outlet duct

(2) Power supply cable
(3) Capacitor
(4) Hydraulic control and filter panels

(5) PTO gear boxes
(6) Main hydraulic pumps
(7) Auxiliary hydraulic pumps
(8) Not used
(9) Hydraulic pump for hydraulic oil cooler fan drive
(10) Suction oil reservoir
(11) Flexible couplings
(12) Batteries
(13) Motor 1
(14) Motor 2
(15) Not used
(16) Air intake doors
45
3.2.3 UNDERCARRIAGE
46
(1) Undercarriage center body
(2) Crawler carrier
(3) Connection pins center body to crawler carrier

(4) Crawler tracks
(5) Rotary distributor
(6) Brake valves

(7) Travel motors
(8) Parking brakes (spring loaded multiple disk type brakes)
(9) Travel gears
(10) Sprocket
(11) Track rollers
(12) Carrier rollers
(13) Valve block of the hydraulic track tensioning system
(14) Hydraulic track tensioning cylinders
(15) Track adjusting cylinders
(16) Guide wheels
47
3.2.4 HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED ACCESS LADDER
48
(A) Access ladder in lowered position
(B) Access ladder in upper position (Working position)
(C) Stop bar

(D) Manual actuator for fire suppression system (if so equipped)
(E) Pull chain for emergency lowering of the access ladder
CAUTION
Use this chain only in emergency cases, when the Operator
does not respond to other communication signals.
(S84) Ladder control switch for lowering the ladder
(S84B) Ladder control switch for lifting the ladder
(S84A) Safety switch for emergency lowering of the access ladder. When the chain (E) is being pulled
down with the motor running, the pilot control system is made inoperative, preventing further
movements of the Shovel.
(S22) Safety sensor, located on ladder pivot bracket

Function of sensor (S22): Cut out of the pilot control system and actuation of the hydraulic
swing brake with the ladder in lowered position.
(S91) Monitor and control sensor

Function of sensor (S91):
This sensor monitors the ladder position and controls the moving speed of the ladder. In case
the sensor (S22) fails to function properly, the sensor (S91) prevents unintended movement of
the ladder.
(S33A) Emergency shutdown switch for both main drive motors
Operating the hydraulic Access Ladder
WARNING
● Make sure the moving range of the ladder is clear of all
persons before raising the ladder. Stop raising the ladder
by releasing the control switch (S84B) if there are any
obstacles within the moving range of the ladder.
● Mount the ladder only in completely lowered position.

Entering the ladder in any other position can result in
serious injury or death.
● DO NOT lift persons with the hydraulic access ladder.

Death or serious injury can result.
● DO NOT lift objects (tools) with the hydraulic access lad-

der.
49
50
Operating the hydraulic Access Ladder, illust. (Z 23018)
Raise the ladder
Enter the Shovel with ladder in fully lowered position (A).
Start the motor.
For starting procedure → See "STARTING THE MAIN

DRIVE MOTORS" on page 228.
Go back to the ladder control switch (S84B).
Raise the ladder by pressing button (84B) until the ladder con-
tacts the stop bar (C) in position (B).
Lowering the ladder
Stop the main drive motors.
For stopping procedure → See "STOPPING THE MAIN

Lower the ladder by pressing push button (S84). If necessary,

slightly push the ladder until it starts moving down by its own
weight.
WARNING
● Make sure the moving range of the ladder is clear of all
persons before lowering the ladder.
● Enter the ladder only after the ladder is in fully lowered

position (A).
NOTICE
Check safety sensor of access ladder for correct function
after every 50 operating hours or once a week. Refer to Main-
tenance Section 4, for checking procedure.
51
3.2.5 EMERGENCY ESCAPE LADDER
52
Legend for illust. Z24090
(1) Sliding window, serves also for emergency exit
(2) Release lever for hinged railing bar (3)
(3) Hinged railing bar
(4) Rigidly mounted emergency escape ladder
(5) Rope ladder. The upper end of the rope ladder is

fixed onto the lower rung of the rigid escape ladder
(4) by means of the fasteners (6), see detail (X). The
lower end of the rope ladder is fixed on brackets (8)
and secured with rubber fasteners (7), see section
(A-A).
(6) Hooks for fastening the rope ladder onto the rigid
ladder (4)
(7) Rubber fasteners for rope ladder in lifted position
(8) Bracket for rope ladder in lifted position. The lower

rung of the rope ladder is hooked up into the brack-
ets (8)
Using the emergency escape ladder
In case of emergency with normal walkways obstructed use

escape ladder (4) and (5) for leaving the machine. Proceed as fol-
lows:
1. Move up lever (2) and pull out.
2. Open the hinged railing bar (3).
3. Unhook fasteners (7) and take out rope ladder rung from
brackets (8).
4. Let the rope ladder fall down to the ground. The upper end of
the rope ladder is fixed onto the lower rung of the rigid ladder
(4).
5. Use the rigid ladder (4) and then the rope ladder (5) for leav-
ing the shovel.
53
3.2.6 EMERGENCY MOTOR SHUTDOWN FROM GROUND MAN OR

OPERATOR WARNING SYSTEM
54
Emergency Motor Shutdown System actuated

from Ground Man (Special Equipment)
(1) Actuating chains for emergency shut down of both

motors. To stop the motors, pull down one of the
chains (1).
(2) Actuating chain for hydraulically operated service

arm.
(3) ECS display on the instrument panel in the Opera-
tor’s cab. When one of the chains (1) is being pulled
down from ground man, both motors will be stopped
and the following message will be displayed on the
ECS screen (3):
Motor shut down has been actuated from ground
man.
CAUTION
Never stop the main drive motors with the actuating chains
(1) except in case of emergency.
Operator Warning System (Special Equipment)
This system is used to inform the Operator that someone wants to

enter the Shovel or to draw the Operator’s attention to special cir-
cumstances requiring his action.
(1) Actuating chains for pull switches of the Operator

warning system
(2) Actuating chain for hydraulically operated service
arm.
(3) ECS display on the instrument panel in the Opera-

tor’s cab. When one of the chains (1) is being pulled
down the following message will be displayed on the
ECS screen (3):
Warning: Pull switch from ground man actuated.
As soon as a chain (1) is being pulled down, the above message

will be displayed informing the Operator that someone wants his
attention. In such a case, the Operator should stop work until he
has received the ground man’s request.
55
3.2.7 OPERATOR’S CAB WITH INTEGRATED FALLING OBJECT

PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE (FOPS)
56
Legend for illust. Z 25199
NOTICE
The Operator’s cab is equipped with an integrated Falling
Object Protective Structure (FOPS) that meets the require-
ments of ISO 3449. Any modifications on the steel structure
of the cab are inadmissible. Repairs on the FOPS must only
be carried out by specialists having the authorization for
repair work on Falling Object Protective Structures and in
accordance with the manufacturer’s repair instructions.
A Rear View of Operator’s Cab
(1) Door handle

(2) Door latch (with door fully opened)
(3) Door locking pin, engages into latch (2) when the cab door
is fully opened.
(4) Light switch for access area lighting
(5) Light switch for interior cab lighting
(6) Air conditioner door
(7) Outside Mirrors with integrated heaters, both mirrors are

adjusted electrically via a control switch on the instrument
panel. Refer to page 77 for more information.
(8) Main Working Lights
(9) Adapter for Warning Beacon
B Front View of Operator’s Cab
(10) Release lever for door lock (2 - 3)
(11) Door opener push button
(12) Safety lock lever, see page 59 for more information
(13) Control levers for working attachment, see page 66 for more
information.
(14) Operator’s Seat, refer to page page 63 for more information.
(15) Upper windshield wiper
(16) Lower windshield wiper
CAUTION
Make sure the cab door is always closed when working with
the Shovel.
Lock the door in open position by engaging latch (2) into
locking pin (3).
57
58
Legend for illustration Z25200
C Top View of Operator’s Cab
(1) Co-driver’s seat, refer to page 64 for more information
(2) Windshield washer reservoir, refer to page 61 for more infor-

mation.
(3) Washbasin with water tap

(4) Refrigerator box
(5) Portable fire extinguisher located behind the Operator’s

seat. Make sure the fire extinguisher is always charged and
ready for use.
(6) Heater unit located in the seat base
(7) Safety lock lever.

● This lever locks the controls for working equipment,
swing and travel drive when placed in the fully rear posi-
tion (L).
● Start the motor with lock lever in LOCKED position (L).

Thereafter set the lock lever to free position (F) in order
to enable operation of the hydraulic control system.
WARNING
Before leaving the operator’s cab set the safety lock
lever to LOCK position (L). If the controls are not
locked, and they are touched inadvertently, this may
lead to a serious accident.
(8) Instrument panel, see page 77 for more information.
(9) Analog gauges and ECS display, see page 77 for more
information.
(10) Pedal for closing the bottom dump bucket (Face shovel
only)
(11) Pedal for opening the bottom dump bucket (Face shovel
only)
(12) Travel control pedal, left track forward - reverse
(13) Travel control pedal, right track forward - reverse
(14) Swing brake pedal
59
60
Operator’s Cab - Hand Wash Sink and Refrigerator

Box
(1) Hand wash sink

(2) Water-tap
WARNING
No drinking water.
Use for hand washing only
Water tank for hand wash sink. The capacity of the

(3)
water tank is 50 liters. The tank can be filled through
the filler opening (10) or via the adapter on the
receiver panel. Refer to page 276 for more informa-
tion.
(4) Refrigerator box
(5) Refrigerator box cover
(6) Refrigerator unit

(7) Access cover for water tank (3) and refrigerator unit
(6)
(8) Access cover for windshield washer reservoir
(9) Windshield washer reservoir. The water reservoir is

accessible after removing the cover (8). The reser-
voir has a capacity of 7 liters.
(10) Filler cap lockable. To fill the water tank (3) unlock
cap (10) using the key provided and remove. Be
sure to lock the cap after filling the water tank.
61
62
Operator’s Seat Adjustment
Before operating the Shovel adjust the seat and mirrors for Oper-
ators maximum comfort, visibility, and complete control of the
Shovel.
Legend for illust. (Z 21420):
(1) Seat suspension adjustment (firm to soft ride)
(2) Height adjustment
(3) Seat depth adjustment

(4) Seat cushion tilt adjustment
(5) Fore/aft adjustment
(6) Not used on this model

(7) Control lever carrier
(8) Headrest (optional)
(9) Seat heater switch (optional)

(10) Lumbar support adjustment
(11) Armrest, foldable
(12) Armrest adjustment
(13) Backrest adjustment
(14) Fore/aft isolator
Seat belt (not shown)
WARNING
● Use seat belt in accordance with the local safety regula-
tions and laws.
● Check condition and fastening of the seat belt. Replace

any worn or damaged part of the seat belt system.
● To ensure proper functioning of the seat belt replace the

seat belt and securing parts after every three years.
For more Information, refer to the separate Operating Instruction

Manual ”AIR SUSPENSION SEAT” in volume 2 binder.
63
Co-driver’s Seat
(1) Seat suspension frame (3) Back rest
(2) Folding seat
Adjust Seat Position
A - Fold down seat to sitting position. The seat will automatically

move up when released.
B - To swing the seat out, towards the front, first lift seat suspen-
sion frame (1) and then swing seat to the front; facing the wind-
shield.
C - Swing seat to stop position.
D - With the seat in its final stop position lower seat suspension
frame (1). The seat suspension frame (1) must engage into stop
blocks mounted in the seat carrier.
REMARK
Be sure to secure the seat in its home position and swung out
position by lowering suspension frame (1) into the stop blocks of
the seat carrier.
64
This page left intentionally blank
65
3.3 OPERATOR’S CAB - CONTROLS OPERATION
3.3 OPERATOR’S CAB - CONTROLS
3.3.1 CONTROLS WITH BACKHOE ATTACHMENT
66
OPERATION 3.3 OPERATOR’S CAB - CONTROLS
HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEM
There are two control patterns of levers (1 and 2) available:
● ”EURO” control pattern and
● ”KMG” (Komatsu Mining Germany) control pattern
Your Shovel is equipped with the EURO control pattern for levers
(1 and 2).
For more information → See "WORKING WITH THE

ATTACHMENT" on page 242.
WARNING
● Wrong operation of the controls can cause mechanical
break-down, property damage, injury or death.
● Observe the Safety Instructions.
● Before starting the motor, make sure you know the loca-
tion and function of each control.
● Always sit in the Operator’s seat when operating this

machine.
SAFETY CIRCUIT FOR CONTROLS
(Pilot control system cut-out and actuation of hydraulic swing

parking brake)
This system is controlled through the safety lock lever, the
hydraulic access ladder and the service arm of the refilling sys-
tem, if so equipped. It prevents movements of the Shovel and its
attachment as long as the safety lock lever is in locked position
and/or the access ladder is in the lowered position or when the
service arm of the central refilling system is in its lowered position.
67
68
Controls with Backhoe Attachment
Legend for illustration (Z 25063)
(1) Control lever for stick and slew gear
(2) Control lever for boom and bucket

(3) Push button for Truck counter. For counting loaded trucks press this but-
ton. The total number of trucks loaded is shown on the ECS display for
five seconds, refer to page 86 for more information.
(4) Signal horn button and emergency override switch for cable drum initi-
ated reverse travel cut off.
CAUTION
If reverse travel cut off occurs the warning buzzer on the instru-
ment panel sounds and the message “Reverse travel cut off by
cable drum” appears on the ECS display. There are three possible
causes for reverse travel cut off:
● Power cable too slack or
● The ground contact sensing bar of the cable drum hits an obstruc-
tion or
● Temperature of cable drum drive motor too high
Call service personnel for solving the problem.
WARNING
If such a travel cut off happens with a dangerous situation for man
or machine which requires reverse travelling for moving away from
a collapsing face or bench, press button (4) and move the Excava-
tor out of the endangered area. Then stop moving backwards and
call your supervisor for advice. The power cable and/or cable drum
may be damaged through the reverse movement.
69
3.3.2 CONTROLS WITH BOTTOM DUMP BUCKET ATTACHMENT
70
HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEM
There are two control patterns of levers (1 and 2) available:
● ”EURO” control pattern and
● ”KMG” (Komatsu Mining Germany) control pattern
Your Shovel is equipped with the EURO control pattern for levers
(1 and 2).
For more information → See "WORKING WITH THE

ATTACHMENT" on page 242.
WARNING
● Wrong operation of the controls can cause mechanical
break-down, property damage, injury or death.
● Observe the Safety Instructions.
● Before starting the motor, make sure you know the loca-
tion and function of each control.
● Always sit in the Operator’s seat when operating this

machine.
SAFETY CIRCUIT FOR CONTROLS
(Pilot control system cut-out and actuation of hydraulic swing

parking brake)
This system is controlled through the safety lock lever, the
hydraulic access ladder and the service arm of the refilling sys-
tem, if so equipped. It prevents movements of the Shovel and its
attachment as long as the safety lock lever is in locked position
and/or the access ladder is in the lowered position or when the
service arm of the central refilling system is in its lowered position.
Automatic Float Position for Boom and Stick
The Shovel operates automatically with the float position for

boom and stick activated.
That means the lowering movement of boom and stick is always
done in the float position. To deactivate the float position, press
button (3) for boom and/or (4) for stick, and keep depressed as
long as the float position shall be deactivated. When releasing the
buttons the float position is activated again.
71
72
Controls with Bottom Dump Bucket Attachment
Legend for illustration (Z 22332N)
(1) Control lever for stick and slew gear
(2) Control lever for boom and bucket

(3) Push button for deactivation of boom float position
(4) Push button for deactivation of stick float position
(5) Signal horn button and emergency override switch for cable drum
initiated reverse travel cut off.
CAUTION
If reverse travel cut off occurs the warning buzzer on the
instrument panel sounds and the message “Reverse travel
cut off by cable drum” appears on the ECS display. There are
three possible causes for reverse travel cut off:
● Power cable too slack or
● The ground contact sensing bar of the cable drum hits an

obstruction or
● Temperature of cable drum drive motor too high
Call service personnel for solving the problem.
WARNING
If such a travel cut off happens with a dangerous situation
for man or machine which requires reverse travelling for
moving away from a collapsing face or bench, press button
(5) and move the Excavator out of the endangered area. Then
stop moving backwards and call your supervisor for advice.
The power cable and/or cable drum may be damaged
through the reverse movement.
(6) Push button for Truck counter.

For counting loaded trucks press this button. The total number of
trucks loaded is shown on the ECS display, refer to page 86 for
more information.
(7) Pedal for closing the bottom dump bucket
(8) Pedal for opening the bottom dump bucket

73
74
3.3.3 OPERATOR’S CONSOLE
(1) Analog gauges, see page 77 for more information
(2) Text display with key board of the Electronic Control

and Monitoring System (ECS). Refer to page 86 for
more information.
(3) Ashtray
(4) Switch board, see page 77 for more information
(6) Air conditioning control panel, see page 198 for

more information
(7) Switch for adjustment of left and right cab mirror

(8) Cigarette lighter
(9) Plug sockets 24V DC
(10) Radio location
CAUTION
Make sure the cab door is always closed when working with
the Shovel.
Secure the door in open position with the locking device pro-
vided.
75
76
Control Panel
NOTICE
The items (A, B, C, D and E) are part of the Elec-
tronic Monitoring and Control System, refer to
page 86 for more information.
(A) The screen (A) displays the condition of the
machine, the maintenance status, and messages for
the operator and service man.
(B) Keyboard with 8 keys, used to switch the screen and

for input of data
(C) Key operated switch for enabling access to the

Shovel Component levels and for input of opera-
tional data.
(D) Switch group with four switches for menu control of

the Service functions and for the Shovel Compo-
nents (On screen display).
(E) Serial interface (X27) for download of ECS memory

data
(1) Ammeter for rear motor 1
(2) Ammeter for front motor 2
(3) Voltmeter, power supply system
(4) Hydraulic oil temperature gauge
(5) Voltmeter, 24V board net system
(6) Operating hour meter, main drive motors running
(7) Switch board

(8) Rotary switch ”Rear Motor 1 START”
(9) Rotary switch ”Rear Motor 1 STOP”
(10) Rotary switch ”Front Motor 2 START”
(11) Rotary switch ”Front Motor 2 STOP”
(12) Switch, warning beacon on cab roof
(13) Switch, dashboard illumination

(14) Switch, interior illumination
(15) Switch, main working lights
77
78
Switch Board
(16) Switch, cab ventilation blower. Blower runs with low

speed, even with switch in -0- position. (Cab pres-
surizing prevents ingress of dust).
(17) Switch, manual actuation of swing ring gear pinion

lubrication system
(18) Switch for upper and lower windshield wiper

0 - Off
1 - Interval stage
2 - Slow stage
3 - Fast stage
(19) Toggle switch, swing parking brake
● 0 - Parking brake released - UP

● 1 - Parking brake applied - DOWN.
CAUTION
The parking brake should only be applied with superstruc-
ture at complete standstill, except in case of emergency.
Refer to page 240 for more information.
(20) Mirror Heating
(21) Switch, manual actuation of central lubrication sys-

tem
(22) Switch, windshield washer
(23) Key operated main switch
(24) Acoustic warning signal
This signal sounds for approximately 1 second when

a fault message appears on the ECS screen.
CAUTION
In case of too low hydraulic oil level this signal sounds
continuously. Shut down the Shovel, locate and correct
the cause immediately. Fill up hydraulic oil to the correct
level. For the correct checking procedure → See "CHECKS
BEFORE STARTING THE MAIN DRIVE MOTORS" on
page 224.
79
80
Switch Board (continued)
(25) Strike button, emergency shut down of both main

drive motors and pilot control system cut out.
WARNING
In case of emergency push in this button to stop both
main drive motors and to cut out the pilot control circuit.
DO NOT use for normal stopping procedure.
For releasing the switch, turn and pull-up the strike

button.
(26) Switch, RH and LH mirror adjustment
(27) Air conditioning controls, see page 198 for more

information.
(28) Cigarette lighter
(29) Plug sockets 24V DC
(30) Radio
81
82
INTERFACE PANEL FOR DIAGNOSTICS
1. Interface panel
X27 Adapter for download of ECS data
X13 Adapter for connecting an electronic tool to the ECM of the

pump control system MC7
2. Portable fire extinguisher. Observe the local fire prevention

regulations in regard to number, size and location of the
portable fire extinguishers.
Ensure the fire extinguisher is always charged and ready to
use.
83
84
3.3.4 CONTROL UNITS FOR FIRE DETECTION, ACTUATION AND

SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
There are two different systems installed:
A – CHECKFIRE SC-N electric detection and actuation system

which controls the Carbon Dioxide fire suppression system for the
following areas:
● Slip ring unit.
● High voltage switch cabinet.
● Medium voltage and low voltage switch cabinet in the cab

base.
The CHECKFIRE SC-N electric detection and actuation system

consists of control module (1), manual actuator (2), automatic
actuator (3) and thermal spot detectors located in the protected
areas.
The Carbon Dioxide fire suppression system consists of a steel
cylinder filled with extinguishing gas Carbon Dioxide, piping and
discharge nozzles located in the protected areas.
B – CHECKFIRE SC-N electric detection and warning system

which monitors the machinery house via a linear detection wire
routed in the machinery house.
The CHECKFIRE SC-N electric detection and warning system
consists of control module (4) and the linear detection wire routed
in the machinery house.
REMARK
The machinery house is not equipped with a fire suppression
system.
(1) Control module of the CHECKFIRE SC-N electric detection and actuation
system. For more information see page 262.
Refer also to the separate Manual "CHECKFIRE SC-N ELECTRIC
DETECTION AND ACTUATION SYSTEM" for all information concerning -
Operational Modes, Daily Inspection, Maintenance and System Condi-
tions. This manual is filed in volume 2 binder.
(2) Strike button, manual actuation of the Carbon Dioxide fire suppression
system -A-.
(3) Automatic actuator of the Carbon Dioxide fire suppression system -A-.
(4) Control module of the CHECKFIRE SC-N electric detection and warning
system -B-. For more information see page 262.
Refer also to the separate Manual "CHECKFIRE SC-N ELECTRIC
DETECTION AND ACTUATION SYSTEM" for all information concerning -
Operational Modes, Daily Inspection, Maintenance and System Condi-
tions. This manual is filed in volume 2 binder.
85
3.4 ELECTRONIC MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM ECS OPERATION
3.4 ELECTRONIC MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM

ECS
86
OPERATION 3.4 ELECTRONIC MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM ECS
3.4.1 INTRODUCTION
The Electronic Monitoring and Control System ECS incorporates
the following two main functional groups:
1. TEXT DISPLAY (A) with INTEGRATED KEY BOARD (B),

illustration Z25255
2. SERVICE FUNCTIONS operated with KEY GROUP (D) and

KEY SWITCH (C)
1. TEXT DISPLAY and KEY BOARD
1.1 Text Display (A)

Plain text display for continuous monitoring of all Shovel
functions and operating conditions.
Also included are the periodic servicing intervals which
will be displayed according to the operating hours of the
Shovel.
1.2 Integrated Key Board (B) of the Text Display for

the following functions:
Call up messages
Change of value settings
Call up contents of Protocol and Statistics memory
Print out of Protocol and Statistics contents
Refer to page 93 for detailed description of the key func-

tions.
2. SERVICE FUNCTIONS operated with KEY GROUP (D) and

KEY SWITCH (C), illustration Z25526
Display/Deletion of Truck Counter Reading.
Display of Central Lubrication System cycle counter read-

ing
Display of Swing ring gear Lubrication System cycle

counter reading
Display of Service section
Selection of displayed language.
Power Checks.
Display of Maintenance Intervals.
Acknowledgement of carried out Maintenance
Settings of ECS operational data.
87
88
SERVICE FUNCTIONS operated with KEY GROUP (D) and

KEY SWITCH (C), illustration Z25526, continued
Display of ”INPUTS-OUTPUTS”.
This section is basically used for Testing procedures
through authorized service staff and therefore locked dur-
ing normal operation by the software program. Access to
this section can be obtained in the Service section
”INPUTS-OUTPUTS ON/OFF” through actuation of key
switch (C).
Messages ON/OFF
The creation of Messages can be switched off, when for
example, tests in the INPUT / OUTPUT levels are carried
out with the ECS control functions operative (motors run-
ning) and test conditioned messages shall not be dis-
played (stored), i.e. Protocol and Statistics memory will
not be filled with messages caused by testing operations.
Evaluation ON/OFF.
When commissioning or servicing the Shovel the data
evaluation in the respective service function can be
switched off with key switch (C). This prevents an over-
writing of the selected function (Standard display, Inputs-
Outputs or Service) by occurring messages, caused by
repairs on the ECS system.
CAUTION
The function EVALUATION must only be switched OFF
through authorized Service Staff. The instructions in the ECS
Service Manual have to be observed. With the Evaluation
switched OFF all monitoring and control functions of the
ECS are inoperative.
Refer to Section ”SERVICE FUNCTIONS” and ”MENU CON-

TROL” on page 123 for more information.
89
90
(A) Display with basic information

(B) Key board with 8 keys. For the function of the keys
refer to page 93.
(C)) Key operated switch for enabling access to the

INPUT-OUTPUT levels and input of operational
data.
(D) Key section with 4 keys for menu control of Service

Functions and for INPUT-OUTPUT functions (On
Screen Display).
(9) RETURN Key, this key is used for returning to previ-

ous level of INPUT-OUTPUT or Service Functions.
(10) QUI Key, this key is used for access to the next
lower level of INPUT-OUTPUT or Service Functions
and going back to the Standard Display from a dis-
played current message.
(11) "0” Key, this key is used for selection of horizontal

menu items within a main section of the inputs-out-
puts or service levels (LH direction).
(12) ”1” Key, same function as key (11) but in RH direc-

tion. Refer to page 125 Menu Control, for more infor-
mation about the key section (D).
(13) Acoustic warning signal (Buzzer)

● This signal is heard for approximately 1 second
when a fault message appears on screen (B).
● Continuous sound when the hydraulic oil level is

too low.
CAUTION
In case of too low hydraulic oil level this signal
sounds continuously. Shut down the Shovel,
locate and correct the cause immediately. Fill up
hydraulic oil to the correct level.
(14) Switch for truck counter on RH control lever. The

loaded trucks can be counted by actuating this
switch. The total number of trucks loaded will then
be displayed on screen (A) for five seconds.
(E) Plug socket for connecting remote printer or other

data downloading equipment.
For printing out the contents of the Statistics mem-
ory, press key (8) and key (6).For printing out the
contents of the Protocol memory, press keys (7, 6
and 3). Keep key (3) depressed until all messages
are selected and then press key (6) two times. Refer
also to page 115 for more detailed information.
91
92
Function of the keys (1 to 8) of Keyboard (B):
● Text display of that page, which was selected from the Text store,
Record memory or Statistics memory.
1
● Shifting to the mode ”leaf through” of current messages.
ME S S AGE
● Acknowledgement of changed settings.
● Calls up the next text lines or the next pages (in the text mode).
● Change of settings (figures)

2
UP
● Calls up the preceding text lines or preceding pages (in the text mode).
● Change of settings (figures)

3
DOWN
● Display of a desired message
● Moves the cursor

4
PAGE NO ● Change-over to the text mode
● Return to the basic display (basic information or last indicated mes-

sage) from record memory, statistics memory or text store.
5
S YS T E M
Print out of:
6 ● Contents of record memory
DAT A OUT ● Contents of statistics memory
● Acknowledgement of changed settings
● Display of the record memory
PR O
● Display of the statistics memory
STA
93
94
3.4.2 OPERATING THE ELECTRONIC MONITORING SYSTEM
1.0 TEXT DISPLAY (A) with integrated KEY BOARD (B)

illust. Z25526
After switching on the Shovel’s key operated main switch, the fol-
lowing introductory messages will be displayed on screen (A):
1st. # Please be Safety Conscious when working!
This message will be displayed for approximately 10 seconds.
2 nd . |QUI| Did you check the Operating Safety of the

Shovel?
Press the ”QUI” key (10) to acknowledge this message.
3rd. |QUI| Did you do Maintenance according to the Ser-

vice Literature?
Press the ”QUI” key (10) to acknowledge this message. Thereaf-

ter the basic ECS display normally automatically appears on the
screen (A) if no information - or fault messages are present.
Present information - or fault messages overwrite the introductory
messages no. 2 and 3.
-0- Date h: M1 *1) A:

Time M2 *2) A:
*1) M1 = Short form for rear motor on counterweight side

designated as motor 1.
*2) M2 = Short form for front motor on Operator’s cab side

designated as motor 2.
All messages related to one of the two motors, their motor protec-
tion relays and pump distributor gears are identified by the figure
1 or 2.
Example of a motor related message:
Fault No. 512: $h: Shutdown of motor 1

(515) by motor protection relay 0F4-1
Help: - Watch main motor temperature and let motor cool down.
- Check motor protection relay 0F4.
This message applies to the rear motor on counterweight side

-motor 1-.
95
96
Basic Display
The basic display in system level -0- is for general information

during operation and shows the Date, the Time of Day, the Oper-
ating Hours (h) and the motor current (A) of motor 1 (M1) and
motor 2 (M2). Within Level -0- further operating data can be called
up by pressing key (12).
Call up further Operating Data in System Level -0-:

The following data can be called up by pressing key (12), illust.
Z22334
-0- PTO Gear oil temperature M1 Nominal< °C) Actual: °C

-0- PTO Gear oil temperature M2 Nominal< °C) Actual: °C
-0- Hydraulic oil temperature Nominal< °C) Actual: °C
-0- Ambient temperature : °C
REMARK
The maximum permissible temperature of the PTO gear oil
and of the hydraulic oil depends on the viscosity of the oil used.
The following table shows the maximum permissible temperature
of the respective oil viscosity.
PTO Gear Oil
SAE 75W-
Viscosity class according to ISO T 32 CLP 150
140
maximum permissible temperature °C: < 60 < 95 < 95
Hydraulic Oil
Viscosity class VG VG VG VG VG ATF

according to ISO 22 32 46 68 100 3
maximum permissible
< 58 < 69 < 79 < 85 < 85 < 82
temperature °C:
The input (setting) of the viscosity class has to be done in main

group Service *SETTINGS*.
For more information refer to page 129.
97
98
3.4.3 AUTOMATIC DISPLAY OF MESSAGES

The messages of the ECS system are divided into three main cat-
egories as follows:
Category I:
Information messages indicating an operating condition, e.g.

”# swing Parking Brake Applied” or a present maintenance inter-
val message.
How to act:
● These information messages are self-explanatory.
● Press the ”RET” key (9) twice for returning to basic display.
Category II:
Fault messages without automatic shut-down of the unit. These

messages indicating a deviation from normal operating condition.
How to act:
● Immediate shut-down of the unit is not necessary.
● Inform the responsible Service Staff about the fault message.
Category III:
Fault messages resulting in an automatic shut-down of the unit.

These messages indicating a serious failure.
How to act:
● Re-start of the unit can be tried. If the fault still exists, the unit
will not start or automatic shut-down will happen again.
Emergency By-pass switch for the ECS- Shut-

down Function.
The unit is equipped with an Emergency By-pass Switch for the

ECS-system. This switch is located on the ”X2” switch board in
the cab base compartment and marked with ”S27”. The location
of the switch is shown on page 209. If an automatic shut-down of
the Shovel happens, with a dangerous situation for man or
machine, which needs the Shovel to be operable to overcome the
dangerous situation, actuate this switch to override the shut-down
function of the system and to enable a restart of the motors.
As soon as the immediate situation of danger is over, shut down

the unit. Correct the fault that caused the shut down and re-set
the Emergency By-pass switch.
99
100
Automatic Display of Messages
If a fault or an information condition occurs during operation, the

basic display is automatically replaced by a message in text. If a
further condition occurs, another message is displayed so that the
operator is always shown the latest message.
The message text provides the operator with an explanation of
the condition in standard texts.
When a fault message is displayed, further ”HELP” information

relating to the fault message can be obtained by pressing the
”DOWN” key (3), illust. Z25526. All fault and information mes-
sages are listed in section ”Message Texts”. Each message is
related to a page. These MESSAGE PAGES are numbered and
can be called up individually. When a fault message is displayed
the number of operating hours . is displayed and stored at the
same time. Fault and information messages are held as long as
their cause is existent
Maintenance Schedule
In accordance with the operating hours of the Shovel, the initial

and periodic maintenance intervals are automatically displayed.
Example:
After the first 250 operating hours of the Shovel the following
message will be displayed:
# Initial 250 h Maintenance

Perform initial 250 h Maintenance.
Perform maintenance according to the Maintenance section.
Acknowledgement of performed maintenance.
The acknowledgement of performed maintenance is obtained in

the main group ”Service” under menu item ”Maintenance” refer to
Menu Control Chart -VI- on page 143.
101
102
Message Classification
All messages filed in the text store of the text display are listed in
Section ”Table of messages” on page 165 in sequence of their
page numbers and are divided into the following 4 groups:
Group 1
Fault Messages of message text pages number 500 - 731.

When a fault message of this group is displayed, the warning
buzzer (13), illust. Z25526 will sound for 1 second, depending on
the severity of the fault an automatic shut-down of the Shovel can
happen. These messages are recorded in the protocol memory
and in the statistics memory for later evaluation.
Group 2
Fault Messages of message text pages number 734 - 1309.

When a fault message of this group is displayed, the warning
buzzer (13) will sound for 1 second, no shut down of the Shovel.
These messages are recorded in the protocol memory and in the
statistics memory for later evaluation.
Group 3
Acknowledgement messages of performed maintenance of mes-

sage text pages number 1310 - 1319.
The acknowledgement messages serve only for protocollation of
the acknowledgement of performed maintenance. They are
recorded in the protocol memory and in the statistics memory for
later evaluation.
Group 4
Information Messages of message text pages number 1320 -

1535.
Information messages are identified by the sign (#) in the upper
LH corner of the screen (A). These messages are for information
only and are not recorded.
REMARK
The message pages no. 1 - 499 contain the text of the MENU
CONTROL (Service function) of the ECS-system.
103
104
Emergency Indication of Operating Conditions.
The ECS system is equipped with an emergency indication. In

case the text display (A) fails to work, it indicates faults in impor-
tant operating systems of the Shovel. The indication is effected by
means of LED’s at the Programmable Logic Controller ”PLC”
installed in the cab base. Refer to page 206 for the location of the
”PLC”.
The following faults are indicated:
Fault: LED No.:
The ECS system is by-passed (By-pass switch S27 actuated) H30
Start of motor 1 and/or motor 2 blocked by one or more of the six high
H31
pressure filters.
NOTICE
The LED ”H31” monitors all six high pressure filters. Refer to
page 213 for description of the diagnostic codes flashed out by LED
”H31”.
Start of both motors blocked due to closed main shut-off (gate) valve
H37
hydraulic tank
Faulty monitor channel for hydraulic oil temperature H38
Too low hydraulic oil level! Stop the motors H39
Emergency shut down switch actuated H116
Motor shutdown from ground man (if so equipped) H135
105
106
TEXT DISPLAY (A), illust. Z25255
Several messages are present at the same time:

The last input message is displayed. The number of all current
messages is indicated by a flashing number in the second text
line.
Example: Fault message No. 512:
Shutdown Motor 1 by motor protection relay -0- Date: h: M1 A:

*2* h: Time: *3* M2 A:
Number of present messages (flashing)
These present messages can be called up with key (1) (MES-

SAGE). Press key 2 (UP) or 3 (DOWN) for the display of the
present messages.
Call up of ”HELP” Information (HELP Texts) to a displayed

message.
If additional ”HELP” information (HELP Texts) to a displayed fault

message are desired, press key (4) to enter the Text mode. Then
press key (3), to display the ”HELP” text.
Example fault message 512:
Fault No. 512: $h: Shutdown of motor 1

(515) by motor protection relay 0F4-1
Help: - Watch main motor temperature and let motor cool down.
- Check motor protection relay 0F4.
Messages and Help texts are displayed each time in two text
lines. The two next text lines can be called up by pressing key (3)
”DOWN”.
The fault messages including the Help text consist of maximum 8
text lines. For return to the fault message press key (2) ”UP” until
the message is displayed again.
Resetting Fault Messages of the Lubrication Systems after
Repairs which have been carried out with the motor(s) running or
with the motor(s) OFF and Main Switch Key in ON position. After
repairs under the above conditions it is necessary to reset the
control circuit of the concerned lubrication system by actuating
the rotary switch on the instrument panel for a full lube cycle. If
this manually actuated lube cycle is not being carried out, the fault
message ”LUBE SYSTEM FAILURE” will remain on the ECS dis-
play. Resetting of the lube system control circuit can also be done
by shutting down the motor(s) and switching OFF the main switch
key.
107
108
Display of message pages without present mes-

sage.
If there is a statistics print out and the individual Nos. of the mes-
sage pages cannot be adjoined to the message text, the message
text can be called up as follows.
Starting from basic display (Message 2)
-0- Date h: M1 A:
Time M2 A:
Message 500 shall be displayed.
4 Press, a page no appears.

PAGE NO
2 Press, until page 500 appears

UP
1 Press, to display text of message 500

ME S S AGE
Display:
Fault No. 500: $h: Start blocked because of main

(503) shut off (gate) valve
109
110
Display the Contents of Record (PROTOCOL)

Memory, illust. Z25526
7 Press to display Protocol memory.

PR O
Display:
PROTOCOL entry no: 1 status : going
message : 626 date 15.07.05 at 15:27:32
1 Press to display message 626.

ME S S AGE
Example for other entries (e.g. Message No. 980)
Press until the desired message no. 980

3
appears.
DOWN
1 Press to display message 980.

ME S S AGE
Display: Fault Message No. 980:
$h Swing gear house brake off
1 or 4 Press to return to the last message text.

ME S S AGE PAGE NO
Press to return to the basic display (Standard display)

5
or to the last current message
S YS T E M
111
112
Display the Contents of Statistics Memory,

illust. Z25526
8 Press to display statistics memory.

STA
Display:
STATISTICS Appeared: 4 = 80.0 %
Error : 644 Elapsed : 00:02:40 = 100.0 %
2 or 3 Press to leaf through all recorded messages.

UP DOWN
Example Indication in percent how often the fault

has occured in relation in relation to the
total number of faults = 100%
STATISTICS Appeared: 1 = 20.0 %
Error : 500 Elapsed : 00:03:40 = 74.5 %
Message page 500 Duration of the Fault portion in percent of the

fault total error time
Print out Contents of Statistics Memory:
-0- Date h: M1 A:
Time M2 A:
The complete statistics are now being

8 6
printed out.
STA DAT A OU T
Display:
******* STATISTICS PRINTOUT ******
Printing statistics table, please wait....
113
114
How to print out Contents of Record (PROTOCOL) Memory:
Print out the complete Contents of Record (PROTOCOL) Memory
Display:
Press until the maximum amount of

7 6 3
entries (39) is reached
PR O DAT A OU T DOWN
Print from the last > 1< PRO entries
page no all * PRO has 39 entries *P*
The complete PROTOCOL is now being

6 6
printed out.
DAT A OU T DAT A OU T
Distinctive marks for ”OLD” and ”NEW” entries:
New entries, not yet displayed / called up / printed or downloaded

are marked with *P*.
After being displayed / called up / printed or downloaded the
marking will change to -P-.
Print out the last Entries of the Record (PROTCOL) Memory
1st. Possibility - The last (X) Entries under consideration

of all Messages
(X) = desired number of the last entries e.g. 10 (the last 10 entries
of 39 total entries)
Press until the desired nos. of

7 6 3
entries are reached,e.g. 10.
The record memory with the last 10

6 6
entries is now being printed out.
DAT A OU T DAT A OU T
Print from the last > 10<PRO entries
page no all * PRO has 39 entries *P*
115
116
2nd. Possibility - The last (X) Entries of a certain Message
(X) = desired number of the last entries e.g. 10.
This print shows, whether the desired message appeared within

the last 10 entries.
Press until the desired nos. of

7 6 3
entries are reached,e.g. 10.
The position of the brackets > < is now being

6
changed from the entries to the message texts.
DAT A OU T
Select message (page) The records of message 524 of

2 6
e.g. 524. the last 10 entries are printed out..
UP DAT A OU T
Print from the last 10 PRO entries
page no > 524<PRO has 39 entries *P*
117
Explanation of the statistics print-out
You receive for example the following print-out:
Column 1 2 3 4 5
Good 0 = 0.0 % 02:00:00 = 33.3%
524: 1 = 14.3 % 01:00:00 = 25.0%
560: 1 = 14.3 % 01:00:00 = 25.0%

590: 3 = 42.6 % 02:30:00 = 62.5%
626 2 = 28.6 % 01:00:00 = 25.0%
Err.: 7 = 100 % 04:00:00 = 66.6%
Column 1:
Good: Time with no faults, number of faults = 0
Err : Time, where faults have occurred, number of faults = 7
The numbers 524, 560, etc. indicate the message page number in
the text store.
Column 2:
The number indicates, how often the fault has occurred, for exam-
ple the fault of page no. 590 has occurred 3 times. In line ”Err”
(Error) the number of faults is summed up, the result is 7.
Column 3:
Here is indicated in percent, how often the fault has occurred

applying to the total number of faults (7 = 100 %).
Column 4:
The time indicates, how long the fault has been present. If a fault
has occurred more than one time, the sum of time will be indi-
cated here.
Column 5:
The duration of the fault applying to the total time with faults (Err),
= 4:00:00 (4 hours). This number results in the temporal overlap-
ping of the faults. If you sum up the times, you receive 5:30:00.
Good and Err apply to the sum of Good and Err, respectively.
Refer to the diagram on next page for more information.
118
Time Diagram of Statistics Print
The diagram below shows an example, how the time without

faults (Good) and the time with faults (Err) could be distributed
within the total operating time of the ECS.
E: Total operating time of the ECS
524/560/590/626: Total time of a message
Err: Total time of all messages
Good: Total time without messages
Message Number:
524 (01:00:00 0 25.0%)
524
560 (01:00:00 0 25.0%)
560
590 (02:30:00 0 62.5%)
590 626 (01:00:00 = 25.0%)
626
1 2 3 4 5 6 time
Good Error Good
Good (02:00:00 = 33.3%) Err (04:00:00 0 66.6%)
119
120
Return to SYSTEM level:
Display of the Last Message Received or Menu

(Standard Display)
Operation of the keyboard (B) has no influence to the recording of

input messages. For example, if the record memory is called up
via keyboard (B), the ECS switches back to SYSTEM level after a
period of 20 seconds when no further key is actuated within this
period. For immediate return to SYSTEM level (message display
or menu) press key 5 (SYSTEM).
Setting of Screen Brightness

Increase brightness: Press keys (5 and 2) simultaneously.
Decrease brightness: Press keys (5 and 3) simultaneously.
Ex works the display is adjusted to maximum brightness (basic

setting). Any change of the screen brightness via keyboard (B)
will be kept until the system is switched off. When the system is
switched on again, the maximum brightness of screen (A) will be
restored automatically (basic setting).
System Languages
The text of the messages and of the menu control of the ECS-
System is available in 2 languages and can be selected in the
main group SERVICE with the menu control.
Refer to the section ”SERVICE FUNCTIONS AND MENU CON-
TROL” for further information.
Message Numbers and Message PAGE Numbers
Each message of the two available system languages is related

to a message page. The message number and the message
PAGE number are identical for the first language, e.g. English.
The message PAGE numbers of the second language have
always a higher number (offset), although the message number
itself remains the same.
If, for example, the message number. 500
($h: Start blocked because of main Shut-Off (gate) valve)
is displayed in the English (first) language, the applying message
PAGE number is also 500. In the second language e.g. German
the message page number is 503. The message number dis-
played on the screen never changes, only the related message
page number in the second language changes. If the contents of
the protocol memory are printed out in the second language, only
the message page numbers of the second language are shown
on the print. Depending on the type of the message, the mes-
sage PAGE number of the second language will be higher than
the message number by the following numbers (offsets):
Message number range 500-1309: message pages with 3 num-

bers offset
ber offset
bers offset

bers offset
121
122
3.4.4 MENU CONTROL AND SERVICE FUNCTIONS

Menu Control operated with Key Switch (C) and Key Group (D),
illust. Z25526
The menu controls are structured hierarchically. The highest-level

menu is designated ”LEVEL 0” and is accessed by depressing the
”RET” key (9). All lower-level menus have consecutively higher
numbers up to ”LEVEL 5”, see Menu Control Charts I - VI on the
following pages and are accessed by depressing the ”QUI” key
(10). In menu levels (1 and 2), the menu options (main groups)
can be selected horizontally, without having to return to the higher
menu level. In menu levels (3 and 4), the menu options (sub
groups) are horizontally only accessible within their main groups.
When entering a menu level, always the L.H. main- or sub group
will be displayed first. By pressing key (12), all other main groups
in the selected level in the R.H. direction can be called up. For
returning to the starting group (main or sub group) press key (11).
The Menu Control Charts on the following pages show the struc-
ture and contents of each system level. The interconnection of the
main groups through all system levels is also shown.
Menu Control with Key Switch (C) and Key Group (D)
(C) Key operated switch for enabling setting of opera-

tional Data in main group SERVICE and for access
to the INPUT-OUTPUT levels.
(D) Key group with 4 keys for menu control of Service

Functions and INPUTS-OUTPUTS.
(9) Return Key - function:

Return to previous level of INPUTS-OUTPUTS or
Service function.
(10) QUI Key - functions:

Used for access to the lower level.
Acknowledgement of carried out Maintenance
Calling up of current Truck counter reading and lubri-
cation system cycle counter readings
Acknowledgement of inputs and setting of new oil
viscosity
(11) ”0” Key - functions:
Selection of horizontal menu items within the respective
service or INPUT-OUTPUT level in the L.H. direction
Selection of the oil viscosity for hydraulic system or PTO
gear
Change of condition of outputs (0-1).
(12) ”1” Key - function:

Same function as key (11), but in the R.H. selection direc-
tion.
123
124
Menu Control with Key Switch (C) and Key Group (D)
Display of Menu Options, see Menu Control Chart I
EXAMPLE: Display of TRUCK COUNTER READING, starting

from basic display on level -0-
Proceed as follows:
1. Press the ”QUI” key (10), the menu level -1- with the current
truck counter reading appears on the display.
2. If you want to reset the counter, press the ”QUI” key (10)
again. Menu level -2- appears on display. Use key (12) for
setting the counter to zero.
3. Press ”RET” key (9) twice for return to the standard display,
level -0-.
EXAMPLE: Display of LUBRICATION SYSTEMS CYCLE

COUNTER READINGS, starting from basic display on level -0-
Proceed as follows:
1. Press the ”QUI” key (10), the menu level -1- with the starting
item truck counter reading appears on the display.
2. Press key (12) once the Central lubrication system cycle

counter reading appears on display. By pressing key (12)
again the swing ring gear cycle counter reading is displayed.
3. For returning to the standard display level -0- press ”RET” key
(9).
REMARK
Changing of the lubrication cycle counter settings can be car-
ried out in the main group SERVICE under the section *SET-
TINGS*, see also menu control chart III.
125
M
e
n
u
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
w
it
h
K
e
y
S
w
it
c
h
(
C
)
a
n
d
K
e
y
G
r
o
u
p
(
D
)
126
Menu Control with Key Switch (C) and Key Group

(D)
Display of system pressures, menu item Service

*POWER CHECK*
Starting from the menu level -1-, *SERVICE* see menu control
charts I and II.
Proceed as follows:
1. Select menu level -1- by pressing ”QUI” key (10) the starting
menu item *Truck counter reading:* appears on the display,
see chart I.
Press key (12) three times, the main group *SERVICE* is dis-
played. Press key (10), level -2- with menu item *LAN-
GUAGE* appears on the display.
2. Press key (12) once, the menu point *POWER CHECK*

appears on the display.
3. Press key (10), Power Check *DISPLAY* in level 3, see chart

II appears on the display.
4. Press key (10) for display of the present system pressures in

level 4.
5. For returning to the standard display level -0- press ”RET” key
(9) four times.
Adjust hydraulic oil cooler fan speed
Within the menu point *POWER CHECK* the fan speed of the
hydraulic oil coolers can be set to minimum or maximum speed as
follows:
Select menu point Power Check *FAN DRIVE OIL COOLER MIN
/ MAX* in level 3, chart II. Press key (10) the present speed condi-
tion of the cooler fans appears on the display in level 4. To
change the fan speed insert service key (C) and select with keys
(11 and 12) the condition for minimum speed as shown in display
(A) or for maximum speed as shown in display (B).
For display of the system pressures with the adjusted fan speed
press key (9) the menu point Power Check *FAN DRIVE OIL
COOLER MIN / MAX* in level 3 appears on the screen. Select
menu point Power Check *DISPLAY* with key (D) then press key
(10) the current system pressures are now displayed in level 4.
Resetting oil cooler fan speed to normal condition
For resetting the fan speed to normal condition (Evaluation ON)

switch off key switch (C) or go back to menu point *SERVICE* in
level 1 by pressing the Return key (9) three times.
127
128

(D)
Setting of Operational Data, menu item Service

*SETTINGS*
Example: Changing the pause time of the Central Lubrication

System (on machines with factory installed lube systems only).
Starting from the menu level -1-, *SERVICE* see menu control
charts I and III (Z25242).
Proceed as follows:
1. Select menu level -1- by pressing ”QUI” key (10) the starting
menu item *Truck counter reading:* appears on the display,
see chart I.
Press key (12) three times, the main group *SERVICE* is dis-
played. Press key (10), level -2- with menu item *LAN-
GUAGE* appears on the display.
2. Press key (12) three times, the menu point *SETTINGS

appears on the display.
3. Press key (10), *PTO GEAR-OIL VISCOSITY* in level 3, see

chart III appears on the display.
4. Press key (12) two times, the item *CENTRAL LUBRICATION

SYSTEM* is displayed.
5. Press key (10), level 4 with the starting menu item *CONDI-
TION INDICATION* appears on the display.
6. Press key (12) once, the display changes tto menu item
*PAUSE TIME* with the information of the present
*PAUSE TIME (e.g.) 01:00* appears on the display.
7. Press key (10) again, the display changes to level 5 with the
information ”Settings OPERATE KEY SWITCH”.
8. Operate key switch (C), now the ”pause time: 01:00”

”new pause time: 01:00 ”
is displayed.
9. Use key (4) of the Text display keyboard to position the cursor
below the numerical value that shall be changed.
10. Use key (2 and/or 3) ”UP/DOWN” of the Text display key-

board for changing the numerical value.
11. Acknowledge the new setting by pressing key (1). The infor-
mation on the display changes over to the introductory mes-
sage page -0- or if a message is present to the respective
message page.
129
130

(D)
Manual actuation Mode of the Lubrication Systems

with Service Key
The manual actuation mode is useful for testing the electrical and
hydraulic functions of the lubrication systems. The pause time is
reduced to 30 seconds and the holding time to 15 seconds per-
mitting rapid sequences of lubrication cycles. Both lubrication sys-
tems can be set to the manual actuation mode.
CAUTION
In the manual actuation mode all monitoring functions of the
system are made inoperative and, because of the very short
pause and holding times grease will not reach all the lubrica-
tion points.
Carry out manual lubrication by using the service key
1. Insert key into service switch (C) and set to operating posi-
tion.
2. Actuate the rotary switch on the instrument panel of that lubri-

cation system which has to be tested. The message
# SERVICE
appears on the display. Up to ten repeated actuation of the
switch are possible. The lubrication cycles are counted and
displayed in the cycle counter window.
3. After finishing the manual lubrication remove service key (C).

The system returns to the normal timer settings.
131
132

(D)
Setting of Operational Data, menu item Service *SETTINGS*
Example: Changing the hydraulic oil viscosity grade
When changing the hydraulic oil, the viscosity grade of the new oil
has to be entered in the appropriate ”Service/Settings” group, if
the viscosity of the new oil is different from that of the drained oil.
REMARK
The procedure up to the menu item *PTO GEAR-OIL VIS-
COSITY* is described on page 129 Changing pause time of the
Central Lubrication System; item 1. to 3.
Starting from menu item *PTO GEAR-OIL VISCOSITY* in

level -3- proceed as follows, see Menu Control Chart III.
1. Press key (12), the item *HYDRAULIC-OIL VISCOSITY* is

displayed.
2. Press key (10), level -4- Input of viscosity with the information
of the present oil viscosity grade appears on the display.
3. Press key (10) once more, the information ”OPERATE KEY

SWITCH” appears on the display.
4. Operate key switch (C).
5. ”Input of oil viscosity” appears on the display. Under present:

the used oil viscosity grade is indicated. Under new: all the
viscosity grades available in the system are offered for selec-
tion. The example on Chart III shows changing the viscosity
grade from VG 22 to VG 100.
6. Press key (12) until in the field new: VG 100 appears.
7. Press key (10), to acknowledge the new viscosity grade. On

the display the information in the field present: changes to
VG 100.
The procedure input of a new hydraulic oil viscosity grade is now

finished. For returning to the standard display on level -0- press
the key ”RET” (9) four times.
REMARK
When a battery voltage fault has occurred, the operational
data (oil vicosities, timer settings etc.) stored in the Programma-
ble Logic Controller (PLC) can be lost and must be re-entered
after the correct battery voltage has been re-established.
133
134

(D)
Display of Menu Options
Example: Display of INPUTS-OUTPUTS, starting from basic

display on level -0-, see Menu Control Charts I and IV.
The main group *INPUTS-OUTPUTS* is basically used for Test-

ing procedures through authorized service staff and therefore
locked during normal operation. Access to the *INPUTS-OUT-
PUTS* can be obtained in the main group *SERVICE* as
described below.
Proceed as follows:
1. Press the ”QUI” key (10), the menu level -1- *TRUCKS*
appears on the display, see Chart I.
2. Press key (12) three times, the main group *SERVICE*

appears on display.
3. Press key (10), the menu level -2- with the starting group
*Language* appears on the display.
4. Press key (12) four times, the group *INPUTS-OUTPUTS

ON/OFF* appears on the display.
5. Press key (10), the menu level -3- with Menu item INPUTS-
OUTPUTS Condition: 0 (OFF)” is displayed.
6. Press key (12), *OPERATE KEY SWITCH* appears on the

display.
7. Operate key switch (C) ”Condition: 0 (OFF)” appears on the

display.
8. Press key (12) to change the condition from ”0” to ”1 (ON)”

Now access to main group *INPUTS-OUTPUTS* is possible.
9. Press the ”RET” key (9) two times for returning to the menu
level -1-. The main group *SERVICE* appears on the display.
10. Press key (12), for display of the main group

"INPUTS-OUTPUTS*.
All menu levels and items within the main group INPUTS-
OUTPUTS are now accessible by means of key group (D),
refer to menu control charts on the following pages.
135
136

(D).
Display of INPUTS-OUTPUTS
Example: Display of menu items in the group

*ANALOG-INPUTS*,
starting from menu level -2-, see Menu Control Chart IV.
The following menu items shall be displayed:
● Hydraulic oil temperature
● X2 Pilot oil pressure.
Proceed as follows:
1. Starting from display level -2- Inputs-Outputs *ANALOG-

INPUTS*; see chart IV.
2. Press key (10), the starting menu item -Motor current L1 M1-
in level 3 is displayed.
3. Press key (12) twice on the display appears the menu item
”Hydraulic oil temperature” with the input designation
(EW1.1): and for example 72°C (present oil temperature).
The oil temperature sender unit with the designation ”B15” is
also shown on the display.
4. For display of the X2 pilot oil pressure, press key (12) four
times, the following display appears:
B86 X2 - Pressure (EW2.1): 35 bar
Pressure may vary depending on operating condition.
5. For returning to the basic display press ”RET” key (9) three
times.
NOTICE
Some designations of electrical units and their sequence
within the DIGITAL INPUTS group on chart IV may not com-
ply with the ECS version installed in your machine. However,
the method of scrolling through the menu levels and input /
output groups applies to all versions of the ECS system.
Refer to the menu control list on page 148 for the applying
menu version of your machine. All electrical units installed in
your machine are listed up on the Table of Inputs and Out-
puts. This table is attached to the electrical diagram.
137
138

(D).
Example: Display of menu items in the group

*DIGITAL-INPUTS*,
starting from menu level -2-, *ANALOG-INPUTS see Menu Con-
trol Chart IV.
The following menu items shall be displayed:
● Condition of differential pressure switch ”B7-1” of high pres-

sure filter # 3.
● Condition of differential pressure switch ”B22-1” of the pump

regulation oil filter 1.
Proceed as follows:
1. Starting from level-2- *ANALOG-INPUTS* press key (12)

once, the display changes to *DIGITAL-INPUTS*:
2. Press ”QUI” key (10) the starting menu item "0S33A - 0S33D”
(Emergency shut-down switches) in level -3- appears on the
display.
3. Press key (12) eleven times for display of the Condition

(0 or 1) of differential pressure switch ”B7-1” of High Pressure
Filter # 3. The following display appears on the screen:
B5-2 (E5.5): 1 B6-1 (E5.6): 1

B6-2 (E5.7): 1 B7-1 (E5.8): 1 *)
*) In order to know whether the displayed condition 1 is correct or

not correct, it is necessary to check the condition on hand of the
Electrical Diagram and in connection with the ECS Flow Chart.
Depending on the operating status of the machine the displayed
conditions can be 1 or 0.
For quick reference of the unit codes (B7.1, B26 etc.) to their unit
names in plain text, refer to the ”Table of Inputs and Outputs”
which is part of the Electrical Diagram.
4. For displaying the condition (0 or 1) of pressure switch

”B22-1” for pump regulation oil filter 1, press key (12) three
times. The following display appears on the screen:
B22-1 (E11.1): 0*) B22-2 (E11.2): 0

B24 (E11.3): 0 B25 (E11.4): 0
*) See explanation above.
5. By pressing key (12) all further items of the DIGITAL-INPUTS

group can be called up. For going in the opposite direction of
the menu items use key (11).
6. For returning to the basic display press ”RET” key (9) three
times.
139
140
Menu Control with Switch (C) and Key Group (D)
Display of DIGITAL-OUTPUTS
Example: You want to display the condition of the Pump Regu-

lation Valve (Qmin) Y17 in the group *DIGITAL-OUTPUTS*,
starting from menu level -2-, see Control Chart V.
Proceed as follows:
1. Starting from level -2- *ANALOG-INPUTS* press key (12)

twice, the display changes to *DIGITAL-OUTPUTS*:
2. Press ”QUI” key (10) the starting menu item ”H22 ACOUSTIC
SIGNAL* in level -3- appears on the display, see chart V.
3. Press key (12) until the menu item *Y17 PUMP REGULA-
TION QMIN* is displayed.
4. Press key (10). Depending on the Operating Condition of the

hydraulic system, one of the two following displays (A or B) in
level -4- appears on the screen.
A – Display with main pumps in Qmin position, pause switch-

ing active and hydraulic oil cooler fans not running
-4- Pump regulation Qmin

| 0 | 1 | Y17 ( A5.7): 1
B – Display with hydraulic oil at operating temperature,

hydraulic oil cooler fans running and pause switching inac-
tive
-4- Pump regulation Qmin

| 0 | 1 | Y17 ( A5.7): 0
5. For display of further solenoid valve or relay settings go back

to level -3- by pressing ”RET” key (9). Use key (12 or 11) to
select those items you want to be displayed. Press key (10)
for display of settings in level -4-.
6. For returning to the basic display in level -0- press key (9) four
times.
CAUTION
DO NOT change any settings in the INPUT-OUTPUT groups
before having the permission of authorized Service Staff.
141
142
Menu Control with Switch (C) and Key Group (D).
Acknowledgement of carried out Maintenance according to dis-

played MAINTENANCE CALL, see Menu Control Chart I and VI.
Example:
The Maintenance call *INITIAL 250h MAINTENANCE* is dis-
played. Inform the Service Staff for performing the initial 250h
maintenance according to the Maintenance Section. Press key
(9) four times for returning to the basic display. After the initial
250h maintenance has been carried out, acknowledge the MAIN-
TENANCE CALL as follows:
1. Select menu item Maintenance *ACKNOWLEDGEMENT*

level -3-; see Menu Control Chart I and VI.
2. Press key (10), the menu item ”Acknowledgement 250h

maintenance performed ?” is displayed, see Menu Control
Chart VI, level -4-.
3. Press ”QUI” (10), the menu item ”Acknowledgement OPER-

ATE KEY SWITCH” appears on the display.
4. Operate key switch (C), the menu item ”Acknowledgement

250h maintenance performed ?” is displayed.
5. Press ”QUI” (10) to acknowledge the performed mainte-

nance.
6. Press key (9) four times for returning to the basic display.
143
144
Data Transfer from Protocol and Statistics Memory

to various Downloading Equipment
The illustration (Z 20731) shows typical arrangement of several

downloading equipment connected to the text display interface
plug socket (X27).
Legend for illust. (Z 20731)
(1) Text display unit on instrument panel (E35)
(2) Plug socket (serial interface X27) for connecting

data transfer cable to units (4, 5, 6 or 9)
(3) Plug socket for connecting current supply cable to
units (5 or 6)
(4) MODULAR MINING field computer system ”MMS”
(5) Printer
(6) Memory Card System ”MCS”. As a special equip-
ment, this system can also be installed in the instru-
ment panel ex works.
(7) Memory card
(8) Protective box for memory card

(9) Laptop or PC
(10) Soft- and hardware package for PROSTAT operation

program
(11) Data transfer cable (VL3)
(12) Adapter for 25 pin interface on PC or laptop
(13) 3,5” disk PROSTAT software
(14) Instruction manual PROSTAT (PARTS & SERVICE

NEWS No. AH02512)
(15) Change-over switch for connecting the internal out-
put channel to plug socket (2) or to the onboard
MCS system (6) if so equipped
(E6) Programmable Logic Controller ”PLC”
(VL4) Data transfer cable to Memory card system (6)

(VL5) Current supply cable to Memory Card System (6)
(VL6) Data transfer cable to printer (5)
(VL7) Current supply cable to printer (5)
(VL8) Data transfer cable to field computer system (4)
REMARK
The downloading units shown in illust. (Z 20731) are special
equipment.
More information to these units on request.
145
146
Graphical Diagram
see illustration Z21446
This illustration shows the components and the signal flow of a

typical ECS-System for Shovels powered by two electric motors.
Overall View of Menu Control
All items of the Menu Control are listed up on page 148 in

sequence of their Menu Levels.
Overall View of Fault Messages and Information

Messages
All fault messages and information messages are listed up on

page 165 in sequence of their message page Numbers.
147
3.4.5 MENU CONTROL LIST
Level 0: Cockpit - Display
# no messages / messages
-0- Date h: M1: *A

Time EBL M2: *A
- 0 - Gear oil (< °C) M1 : °C
- 0 - Gear oil (< °C) M2 : °C
- 0 - Hydraulic oil (< °C) : °C

- 0 - Ambient temperature : °C : V
Level 1:
- 1 - * TRUCKS : *
- 1 - Central lubrication system

cycle counter value : manual release :
- 1 - Swing ring gear lube system

cycle counter value : manual release :
- 1 - * SERVICE *
- 1 - * INPUTS - OUTPUTS *
Level 2: TRUCKS
- 2 - Trucks
  = Counter resetting :
148
Level 2: Service
- 2 - Service
* LANGUAGE *
- 2 - Service
* POWER CHECK *
- 2 - Service
* MAINTENANCE *
- 2 - Service
* SETTINGS *
- 2 - Service (Menu item)

* INPUTS - OUTPUTS ON / OFF *
- 2 - Service
* MESSAGES ON / OFF *
- 2 - Service
* EVALUATION ON / OFF *
Level 3: Service / LANGUAGE
- 3 - Language
  selected : English
Level 3: Service / POWER CHECK
- 3 - Power check
* DISPLAY *
- 3 - Power check
* FAN DRIVE OIL COOLER MIN / MAX *
Level 4: Service / Power check / DISPLAY
- 4 - M1: A (P1/6: P2/5: ) bar

   (X1.1: P3: P4: ) bar
- 4 - M2: A (P1/6: P2/5: ) bar

   (X1.2: P3: P4: ) bar
Level 4: Service / Power check / FAN DRIVE OIL COOLER,

minimum / maximum speed
- 4 - Fan drive oil cooler min / max

| OPERATE KEY SWITCH
- 4 - min / max | Y6A-1: | Y6B-1:

|0|1| Y6A-2: | Y6B-2:
149
Level 3: Service / MAINTENANCE
- 3 - Maintenance * MAINTENANCE CALL *
- 3 - Maintenance * ACKNOWLEDGEMENT *
Level 4: Service / Maintenance / MAINTENANCE CALL
- 4 - Maintenance call * REMARK *

- 4 - Maintenance call
* PERIODIC 250 h MAINTENANCE *
* PERIODIC1000 h MAINTENANCE *
* INITIAL 250 h MAINTENANCE *
* INITIAL 1000 h MAINTENANCE *
Level 4: Service / Maintenance / ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
- 4 - Acknowledgement
OPERATE KEY SWITCH
QUI 250 h maintenance performed ?
150
Level 3: Service / SETTINGS
- 3 - Settings
* PTO-GEAR - OIL VISCOSITY *
- 3 - Settings
* HYDRAULIC - OIL VISCOSITY *
- 3 - Settings
* CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM *
- 3 - Settings
* SWING RING GEAR LUBE SYSTEM *
- 3 - Settings
* DATE : *
- 3 - Settings
* TIME : *
- 3 - Settings
* OPERATING HOURS h : *
- 3 - Settings
* PROTOCOL CANCEL *
- 3 - Settings
* STATISTICS CANCEL *
Level 4: Service / Settings / PTO-GEAR - OIL VISCOSITY
- 4 - Input of oil viscosity

OPERATE KEY SWITCH
  - 4 - Input of oil viscosity

 QUI new: present:
Level 4: Service / Settings / HYDRAULIC - OIL VISCOSITY
- 4 - Input of oil viscosity

OPERATE KEY SWITCH
  - 4 - Input of oil viscosity

 QUI new: present:
151
Level 4: Service / Settings / CENTRAL LUBRICATION

SYSTEM (CLS)
- 4 - Settings
* CONDITION INDICATION *
- 4 - Settings (minutes)
* PAUSE TIME : *
- 4 - Settings
* LUBE CYCLE COUNTER : *
Level 5: Service / Settings / CLS /

CONDITION INDICATION
Pressure switch B43: pump ON Y7 :

Pause time < : relief Y7A

PAUSE TIME
- 5 - Settings
OPERATE KEY SWITCH
pause time:
new pause time:

LUBE CYCLE COUNTER
- 5 - Settings
OPERATE KEY SWITCH
cycle counter value:

new cycle counter value:
152
Level 4: Service / Settings / SWING RING GEAR LUBE

SYSTEM (SLS)
- 4 - Settings
* PAUSE TIME : *
- 4 - Settings
Level 5: Service / Settings / SLS / CONDITION INDICATION
Pressure switch B46 : pump ON Y9 :

Pause time < : relief Y9A
Level 5: Service / Settings / SLS / PAUSE TIME
- 5 - Settings
OPERATE KEY SWITCH
pause time:
new pause time:
Level 5: Service / Settings / SLS / LUBE CYCLE COUNTER
- 5 - Settings
OPERATE KEY SWITCH
cycle counter value:

new cycle counter value:
153
Level 3: Service / Settings / DATE
- 3 - Settings
OPERATE KEY SWITCH
date:
new date:
Level 3: Service / Settings / TIME
- 3 - Settings
OPERATE KEY SWITCH
time:
new time:
Level 3: Service / Settings / OPERATING HOURS
- 3 - Settings
OPERATE KEY SWITCH
operating hours h:
new operating hours h:
Level 3: Service / Settings / PROTOCOL
- 3 - Settings
OPERATE KEY SWITCH
protocol cancelled:
Level 3: Service / Settings / STATISTICS
- 3 - Settings
OPERATE KEY SWITCH
statistics cancelled
Level 3: Service / (Menu item) INPUTS - OUTPUTS ON / OFF
- 3 - Menu item INPUTS - OUTPUTS

OPERATE KEY SWITCH
- 3 - Menu item INPUTS - OUTPUTS

 0  1  Condition :
154
Level 3: Service / MESSAGES ON / OFF
- 3 - Messages
OPERATE KEY SWITCH
- 3 - Messages
Level 3: Service / EVALUATION ON / OFF
- 3 - Evaluation
OPERATE KEY SWITCH
- 3 - Evaluation
Level 2: Inputs - Outputs
- 2 - Inputs - Outputs
* ANALOG-INPUTS *
* DIGITAL-INPUTS *
* DIGITAL-OUTPUTS *
155
Level 3: Inputs - Outputs / ANALOG-INPUTS
A38-1 Motor current L1 M1

(EW13.1): A
A38-2 Motor current L1 M2

(EW13.2): A
B15 Hydraulic oil temperature

(EW1.1): °C
B49-1 PTO - gear oil temperature M1

(EW1.2): °C
B49-2 PTO - gear oil temperature M2
| (EW1.3): °C
B85-1 X1.1-Pressure (EW13.3): bar
B85-2 X1.2-Pressure (EW13.4): bar

B86 X2 -Pressure (EW2.1): bar
B87A Pump 1/6 (EW2.2): bar|
B87B Pump 2/5 (EW2.3): bar
B87C Pump 3 (EW2.4): bar

B87D Pump 4 (EW14.1): bar
B90 Ambient temperature

(EW1.4): °C
B108 CLS grease level (EW3.1): %

B109 SLS grease level (EW3.2): %
156
Level 3: Inputs - Outputs / DIGITAL-INPUTS
0S15 (E2.7): 0S33A (E2.8):

0S33B (E9.1): 0S33C (E9.2):
0S33D (E9.3): 0S36 (E9.4):

0S54 (E9.5): 1K1 (E9.6):
1K2-1 (E3.3): 1K2-2 (E9.8):
1K3-1 (E3.1): 1K3-2 (E3.2):
1K4 (E9.7): 1K6-1 (E2.1):

1K6-2 (E2.2): 1K8-1 (E3.4):
1K8-2 (E3.5): 1K10 (E3.6):

1K12 (E3.7): 1K14-1 (E2.3):
1K14-2 (E2.4): 1K15 (E3.8):
1K27 (E4.3): 1K30 (E4.4):

1S1 (E4.5): 1S4-1 (E4.6):
1S4-2 (E4.7): 1S5-1 (E4.8):

1S5-2 (E10.1): 1S58 (E10.2):
1U1 (E10.3): 6B2 (E10.6):
6B1 (E10.5): 9K1/9K3 (E10.7):
9K3 (E5.1): 9K4 (E5.2):

B4 (E5.3): B5-1 (E5.4):
B5-2 (E5.5): B6-1 (E5.6):

B6-2 (E9.5): B7-1 (E5.8):
B7-2 (E6.1): B8-1 (E6.2):

B8-2 (E6.3): B16 (E6.6):
B17-1 (E6.7): B17-2 (E6.8):

B22 (E11.1): B24 (E11.3):
B25 (E11.4): B26 (E11.5):

B27-1(E11.6): B27-2 (E11.7):
B28-1(E11.8): B28-2 (E7.1):
B42 (cool) (E7.2): B42 (warm) (E7.3):
B43 (E7.4): B46 (E7.5):

B48 (E7.6): B50 (E7.7):
B97-1 (E7.8): B97-2 (E8.1):

B165 (E14.1): D32 (E8.3):
E19.ge E20.ge
(E14.5): (E14.2):
E20.rs E20.ws
(E14.3): (E14.4):
E23.ge E24.ge
(E14.6): (E14.7):
E32.32 F13 (E8.5):

(E8.4):
157
Level 3: Inputs - Outputs / DIGITAL-INPUTS
K73 (E8.6): K76 (E8.7):

K125 (E8.8): K151 (E12.1):
K177 (E12.2): K178 (E12.3):

K179 (E12.4): K180 (E12.5):
K195 (E7.8): S7 (E12.6):
S10 (E8.2):
S11.1 (E8.1): S11.2 (E13.7):

S11.3 (E13.8): S23 (E12.7):
S24 (E12.8): S26 (E13.1):

S27 (E13.2): S28 (E13.3):
S31 (E13.4):
S34 (E13.5): S43 (E13.6):
S59 (E6.4): S82 (E1.6):
S85 (E4.2): S86 (E4.1):
S155 Qmax (E2.6): S155 Qmin (E2.5):
Level 3: Inputs - Outputs / DIGITAL-OUTPUTS
-3- * H22 ACOUSTIC SIGNAL *
-3- * H52 H76 H78 SIGNAL LAMP

TANK FULL *
-3- * K20 ACOUSTIC SIGNAL
GREASE CONTAINER FULL *
-3- * K50 RELAY BUCKET CUT-OFF *
-3- * K93-1 RELAY SHUTDOWN 1 *
-3- * K93-2 RELAY SHUTDOWN 2 *
158

-3- * K100 RELAY PLC SELFHOLDING *
-3- * K197 LOWER WINDSCREEN WIPER SLOW *
-3- * K198 LOWER WINDSCREEN WIPER FAST *
-3- * K199 UPPER WINDSCREEN WIPER SLOW *
-3- * K200 UPPER WINDSCREEN WIPER FAST *
-3- * Y6A-1 VALVE FAN DRIVE 1

OIL COOLER (minimum speed)*
-3- * Y6A-2 VALVE FAN DRIVE 2

OIL COOLER (minimum speed)*
-3- * Y6B-1 VALVE FAN DRIVE 1

OIL COOLER (medium speed) *
-3- * Y6B-2 VALVE FAN DRIVE 2

OIL COOLER (medium speed) *
-3- * Y7 VALVE CLS PUMP ON *
-3- * Y7A VALVE CLS RELIEF *
-3- * Y9 VALVE SLS PUMP ON *
-3- * Y9A VALVE SLS RELIEF *
-3- * Y17 VALVE PUMP REGULATION

QMIN *
-3- * Y17A VALVE WARMING-UP TIME
1/2 QMAX *
-3- * Y53-1 GEAR OIL COOLER 1

BACK - PRESSURE *
-3- * Y53-2 GEAR OIL COOLER 2

BACK - PRESSURE *
-3- * Y101 VALVE OIL COOLER
BACK - PRESSURE *
159

/ H22 ACOUSTIC SIGNAL
-4- Output signals

-4- Acoustic signal
|0|1| H22 (A5.1):

/ H52 H76 H78 SIGNAL LAMP TANK FULL
-4- Output signals

-4- H52 (A3.1): H76 (A3.2):

| 0 | 1 | H78 (A3.3): :

/ K20 ACOUSTIC SIGNAL GREASE CONTAINER FULL
-4- Output signals

-4- Relay acoustic signal grease container full

|0|1| K20 (A7.8):

/ K50 RELAY BUCKET CUT-OFF
-4- Output signals

-4- Relay bucket cut-off

|0|1| K50 (A5.2):

/ K93-1 RELAY SHUTDOWN 1
-4- Output signals

-4- Relay shutdown 1

|0|1| K93-1 (A1.1):
160

/ K93-2 RELAY SHUTDOWN 2
-4- Output signals

-4- Relay shutdown 2

|0|1| K93-2 (A1.2):

/ K100 PLC SELFHOLDING
-4- Output signals

-4- Relay PLC selfholding

|0|1| K100 (A1.3):

/ K197 RELAY LOWER WINDSCREEN WIPER SLOW
-4- Output signals

-4- Relay Lower windscreen wiper slow

|0|1| K197 (A3.4):

/ K198 RELAY LOWER WINDSCREEN WIPER FAST
-4- Output signals

-4- Relay Lower windscreen wiper fast

|0|1| K198 (A3.8):

/ K199 RELAY UPPER WINDSCREEN WIPER SLOW
-4- Output signals

-4- Relay Upper windscreen wiper slow

|0|1| K199 (A13.6):
161

K200 RELAY UPPER WINDSCREEN WIPER FAST
-4- Output signals

-4- Relay Upper windscreen wiper fast

|0|1| K200 (A13.7):

/ Y6A-1 VALVE FAN DRIVE 1 OIL COOLER
(minimum speed)
-4- Output signals

-4- Valve fan drive 1 oil cooler

|0|1| Y6A-1 (A3.5):

/ Y6A-2 VALVE FAN DRIVE 2 OIL COOLER
(minimum speed)
-4- Output signals


|0|1| Y6A-2 (A3.6):

/ Y6B-1 VALVE FAN DRIVE 1 OIL COOLER
(medium speed)
-4- Output signals


|0|1| Y6B-1 (A3.7):
162

/ Y6B-2 VALVE FAN DRIVE 2 OIL COOLER
(medium speed)
-4- Output signals

|0|1| Y6B-2 (A3.8):

/ Y7 VALVE CLS PUMP ON
-4- Output signals

-4- CLS pump ON

| 0 | 1 | Y7 (A5.3):

Y7A VALVE CLS RELIEF
-4- Output signals

-4- CLS valve relief

| 0 | 1 | Y7A (A5.4):

/ Y9 VALVE SLS PUMP ON
-4- Output signals

-4- SLS pump ON

| 0 | 1 | Y9 (A5.5):

/ Y9A VALVE SLS RELIEF
-4- Output signals

-4- SLS relief

| 0 | 1 | Y9A (A5.6):
163

/ Y17 VALVE PUMP REGULATION QMIN
-4- Output signals
-4- Valve pump regulation Qmin

| 0 | 1 | Qmin Y17 (A5.7):

/ Y17A VALVE WARMING-UP TIME 1/2 QMAX
-4- Output signals
-4- Valve warming-up time

| 0 | 1 | 1/2 Qmax Y17A (A5.8):

/ Y53-1 GEAR OIL COOLER 1
BACK - PRESSURE
-4- Output signals
-4- Gear oil cooler 1 back-pressure

| 0 | 1 | Y53-1 (A7.1):

/ Y53-2 GEAR OIL COOLER 2
BACK - PRESSURE
-4- Output signals
-4- Gear oil cooler 2 back-pressure

| 0 | 1 | Y53-2 (A7.2):

/ Y101 VALVE OIL COOLER BACK-PRESSURE
-4- Output signals
-4- Valve oil cooler back-pressure

|0|1| Y101 (A7.3):
164
3.4.6 FAULT AND INFORMATION MESSAGE LIST

The messages are divided into four groups as follows:
Group 1 Message Text Pages:

The fault messages of group 1 will be stored and result
500 - 733
in:
● Start blocked condition or
● Automatic shutdown of the Shovel or
● Attention of Service Staff required.
Group 2 The fault messages of group 2 will be stored. Message Text Pages:
734 - 1309
Group 3 The information messages of group 3 will be stored. Message Text Pages:
1310 - 1319
Group 4 The information messages of group 4 will not be Message Text Pages:
stored. 1320 - 1535
Explanation of Control Signs shown at the beginning of the

first text line:
The Dollar sign serves as a reference signal for on-

$: line data transfer on machines using the Modular
Mining Dispatch System ”MMS”.
#: Message will not be stored.
?: Recording of this message in the protocol memory is

accomplished with ”COMING” registration only.
165
Fault and Information Message List
GROUP 1
Fault Message Texts of message pages No. 500 - 733
Fault No. 500: $h: Start blocked through main Shut-Off (gate)
(503) *1) valve
Limit switch S31 not closed.

Help:
- Check for broken cables to switch S31.
Fault No. 506:

$h: Start of motor 1 blocked by high pressure filter #1
(509)
Differential pressure switch B5-1 not closed
Help:
- Check cables to differential pressure switch B5-1 .
Fault No. 512: $h: Shutdown motor 1 by motor

(515) protection relay 0F4-1
- Watch main motor temperature, let motor cool down.

Help:
- Check motor protection relay 0F4-1..
Fault No. 518: $h: Shutdown motor 2 by motor

(521) protection relay 0F4-2
- Watch main motor temperature, let motor cool down.

Help:
- Check motor protection relay 0F4-2..
Fault No. 524:

$h: High pressure filter #1 restricted. Stop the motor 1
(527)

Help: - Clean or replace filter element.
- Check pump
*1) Numbers in brackets are the message page numbers of

the second language.
166
Fault No. 530: $h: Trip: Motor 1 winding temperature too high
(533)
- Watch main motor temperature, check air cooling system

Help:
- Check protection relay 1A3-1, 1A3A-1 and 1A3B-1.
Fault No. 536: $h: Trip: Motor 2 winding temperature too high
(539)
- Watch main motor temperature, check air cooling system

Help:
- Check protection relay 1A3-2, 1A3A-2 and 1A3B-2.
Fault No. 542:

$h: Start blocked by wrong motor rotation
(545)
- Change 2 phases of power supply.

Help:
- Check rotation direction relay 1F4.
Fault No. 548: $h: Motors switched OFF due to closed main
(551) Shut-Off (gate) valve
Main Shut-Off (gate) valve not fully open.

Help:
Open the valve (indicated by S31)
Fault No. 554: $h: Trip: Motor 1 bearing temperature too high
(557)
- Check main motor bearings.

Help:
- Check protection relay 1A4-1 and 1A5-1.
Fault No. 560: $h: Trip: Motor 2 bearing temperature too high
(563)
- Check main motor bearings.

Help:
- Check protection relay 1A4-2 and 1A5-2.
Fault No. 566:

$h:
(569)
Help:
Fault No. 572:

$h:
(575)
Help:
167
Fault No. 578:

$h:
(581)
Help:
Fault No. 584:

$h:
(587)
Help:
Fault No. 590: $h: Shutdown:

(593) Hydraulic oil level too low
- Fill up hydraulic oil.

Help:
- Check level sensor B4 and B50.
Fault No. 596: $h: Shutdown due to pressure increase in low voltage
(599) capacitor
- Pressure increase in low voltage capacitor 0C1-1 or

Help: 0C1-2
- Check capacitor.
Fault No. 602:

$h:
(605)
Help:
Fault No. 608:

$h:
(611)
Help:
Fault No. 614:

$h:
(617)
Help:
Fault No. 620:

$h:
(623)
Help:
168
Fault No. 626:

(629)
Differential pressure switch B6-1 not closed.

Help:
- Check cables to differential pressure switch B6-1.
Fault No. 632:

$h: Fire on board (Shutdown)
(635)
Fire suppression system 9K1/9K3 actuated.
- Inform the fire brigade.
Help:
- Evacuate endangered Persons.
- Fight the fire and recharge the system
Fault No. 638:

$h: Start of motor 1 by high pressure filter #3
(641)

Help:
Fault No. 644:

(647)

Help:
Fault No. 650:

(653)

Help:
Fault No. 656:

$h:
(659)
Help:
Fault No. 662:

$h: High pressure filter 2 restricted. Stop the motor 1
(665)

- Check pump
169
Fault No. 668:

(671)

- Check pump
Fault No. 674:

(677)
- Check pump
Fault No. 680:

(683)

- Check pump.
Fault No. 686:

$h:
(689)
Help:
Fault No. 692:

(695)

- Check pump.
Fault No. 698:

$h:
(701)
Help:
Fault No. 704:

$h:
(707)
Help:
Fault No. 710:

$h:
(713)
Help:
170
Fault No. 716:

$h:
(719)
Help:
Fault No. 722:

$h:
(725)
Help:
Fault No. 728: $h: Short-circuit at PLC output

(731) group A1X / A3X / A5X / A7X / A13X
- MK-LED indicates the output group.

Help:
- Check cables at the output group.
GROUP 2
Fault Message Texts of message pages No. 734 - 1309 will be
stored
Fault No. 734: $h: Faulty monitor channel for pump #1/6 pressure
(737)
Pressure pick up B87A for the pump #1/6 pressure shows

Help: inadmissible values.
- Check sensor and cables.
Fault No. 740:

$h: Faulty monitor channel for pump #2/5 pressure
(743)
Pressure pick up B87B for the pump #2/5 pressure shows

Fault No. 746

$h: Faulty monitor channel for pump #3 pressure
(749)
Pressure pick up B87C for the pump #3 pressure shows

Fault No. 752: $h: Faulty monitor channel for pump #4 pressure
(753)
Pressure pick up B87D for the pump #4 pressure shows

171
Fault No. 758:

$h:
(761)
Help:
Fault No. 764:

$h:
(767)
Help:
Fault No. 770:

$h:
(773)
Help:
Fault No. 776: $h: Shutdown through emergency stop switch S33A
(779)
Emergency stop switch S33A at the machinery house door

Help: actuated.
- Find cause
Fault No. 782: $h: Shutdown through emergency stop switch S33B
(785)
Emergency stop switch S33B at control valves actuated.

Help:
- Find cause
Fault No. 788: $h: Shutdown through emergency stop switch S33D.
(791)
Emergency stop switch S33D in machinery house actu-

Help: ated.
- Find cause
Fault No. 794:

$h:
(797)
Help:
Fault No. 800: $h: Faulty pressure switch for gear oil filter of
(803) PTO gear 1
Closed contact of pressure switch B27-1 for PTO-gear

Help: lubrication filter 1 with switched off motor.
- Check pressure switch and cables.
172
Fault No. 806:

$h: Faulty pressure switch for pump regulation oil filter
(809)
Closed contact of pressure switch B22 for pump regulation

Help: filter with switched off motor.
Fault No. 812:

$h: Faulty pressure switch for oil tank breather filter
(815)
Closed contact of pressure switch B24 for oil tank breather
Help: filter with switched off motor.
Fault No. 818:

$h: Faulty pressure switch for return oil filter
(821)
Closed contact of pressure switch B26 for return oil filter

Help: with switched off motor.
Fault No. 824:

$h: Faulty pressure switch for leak oil filter
(827)
Closed contact of pressure switch B25 for leak oil filter with
Help: switched off motor.
Fault No. 830:

$h: No 24 V voltage at circuit breaker F13
(833)
No 24 V behind circuit breaker F13.

Help: - Check circuit breaker F13.
- Check current supply to circuit breaker.
Fault No. 836 $h: Faulty pressure switch of fan drive oil filter for oil
(839) cooler 1
Pressure switch B28-1 indicates pressure (contact closed)

Help: although main motor 1 is not running.
- Check pressure switch B28-1and cables.
Fault No. 842: $h: Hydraulic oil far below operating temperature. Wait
(845) for warm-up phase!
The machine was taken into operation although the start

Help: viscosity was not attained.
- Preheat hydraulic oil !
173
Fault No. 848: $h: Faulty monitor channel for hydraulic oil tempera-
(851) ture
Sensor B15 shows inadmissible values.

Help:
Fault No. 854:

$h: PTO-gear 1 oil filter restricted
(857)
Help: - Replace filter element. (indicated by B27-1)
Fault No. 860:

$h: Pump regulation oil filter restricted
(863)
Help: - Replace filter element. (indicated by B22)
Fault No. 866:

$h: Oil tank breather filter restricted
(869)
Fault No. 872:

$h: Return oil filter restricted
(875)
Help: - Replace filter elements. (indicated by B26)
Fault No. 878:

$h: Leak oil filter restricted
(881)
174
Fault No. 884:

$h: Warning: Mains transformer temperature too high.
(887)
Mains transformer temperature too high.

Help: - Check ventilation system.
- Check trip relay 1A1.
Fault No. 890:

$h: Fan drive oil filter oil cooler 1 restricted
(893)
Fault No. 896:

$h: Faulty monitor channel for motor 1 current
(899)
The motor current is beyond the permissible limits.

Help:
- Check monitor channel. (indicated by A38-1)
Fault No. 902:

$h: Faulty monitor channel for motor 2 current
(905)
The motor current is beyond the permissible limits.

Help:
- Check monitor channel. (indicated by A38-2)
Fault No. 908:

$h:
(911)
Help:
Fault No. 914:

$h:
(917)
Help:
Fault No. 920: $h: Faulty monitor channel for oil temperature of PTO
(923) gear 2
Temperature sensor B49-2 for PTO gear oil shows inad-

Help: missible values.
175
Fault No. 926:

$h: Oil temperature of PTO gear 2 too high
(929)
- Check gear oil cooling circuit.

Help:
- Clean gear oil cooler. (indicated by B49-2)
Fault No. 932:

$h:
(935)
Help:
Fault No. 938: $h: Hydraulic oil temperature too high.

(941) Bucket motion switched off.
Cool off the oil by moving attachment w/o load.

Help: - Check hydraulic oil cooling system.
- Clean oil cooler. (indicated by B15)
Fault No. 944: $h: Faulty monitor channel for oil temperature of PTO
(947) gear 1
Temperature sensor B49-1 for PTO gear oil shows inad-

Fault No. 950:

$h: Oil temperature of PTO gear 1 too high
(953)
- Check gear oil cooling circuit.

Help:
- Clean gear oil cooler. (indicated by B49-1)
Fault No. 956:

$h: Faulty monitor channel for ambient temperature
(959)
Temperature sensor B90 for ambient temperature shows

Fault No. 962:

$h: Control pressure X1.1 for the main pumps too high
(965)
- Check / adjust electronic pump regulation.

Help: - Check / adjust pressure reduction valve. (indicated by
B85-1)
176
Fault No. 968:

$h: Pilot pressure X2 too low.
(971)
Help: - Check / adjust pressure relief valve. (indicated by B86)
Fault No. 974:

$h: Pilot pressure X2 too high
(977)
Help: - Check / adjust pressure relief valve. (indicated by B86)
Fault No. 980:

$h: Swing gear house brake OFF
(983)
- Check solenoid valve Y5.

Help:
- Check pressure switch B16.
Fault No. 986

$h: Travel gear house brake OFF
(989)

Help:
Fault No. 992:

$h: Travel gear house brake ON
(995)

Help:
Fault No. 998:

$h: Faulty pressure switch for strainer oil cooler
(1001)
Closed contact of pressure switch B165 of return oil

Help: strainer with switched off motor.
Fault No. 1004:

$h: Strainer oil cooler restricted
(1007)
Help: - Replace strainer.
Fault No. 1010:

$h:
(1013)
Help:
177
Fault No. 1016:

$h: Faulty monitor channel for X1.2-pressure
(1019)
Pressure pick up B85-2 for the X1.2-pressure shows inad-

Fault No. 1022: $h: Control pressure X1.2 for the main pumps
(1025) too high
- Check / adjust electronic pump regulation.
Help: - Check / adjust pressure reduction valve. (indicated by
B85-2)
Fault No. 1028:

$h: Central lube system grease container empty
(1031)
The sensor B108 in the grease container detects no

Help: graese. Bucket cut off within 4 hours.
- Replace or fill grease container.
Fault No. 1034:

$h: Central lube system failure
(1037)
Lube cycle is not performed in the given time.

Help: - Check valve Y7 and pressure switch B43.
- Check injectors.
Fault No. 1040:

$h: Central lube system failure
(1043)
The lube lines are not relieved in the given time.

- Check injectors.
Fault No. 1046: $h: Swing ring gear lube system grease container
(1049) empty
The sensor B109 in the grease container detects no

Help: grease. Bucket cut off within 4 hours.
- Replace or fill grease container.
Fault No. 1052:

$h: Swing ring gear lube system failure
(1055)
Lube cycle is not performed at the given time.

- Check injectors.
178
Fault No. 1058:

$h: Swing ring gear lube system failure
(1061)
The lube lines are not relieved at the given time.

- Check injectors.
Fault No. 1064: $h: Faulty pressure switch of gear oil filter for
(1067) PTO gear 2
Closed contact of pressure switch B27-2 for PTO-gear
Help: lubrication filter 2 with switched OFF motor.
- Check pressure switch and connected cables.
Fault No. 1070: $h: Faulty pressure switch of fan drive oil filter for oil
(1073) cooler 2
Closed contact of pressure switch B28-2 for cooler fan

Help: drive filter with switched OFF motor.
Fault No. 1076:

$h:
(1079)
Help:
Fault No. 1082:

$h:
(1085)
Help:
Fault No. 1088:

$h: The ECS is by-passed
(1091)
- Reset by-pass switch S27.

Help:
- Remove bridge wires.
Fault No. 1094:

$h: PTO gear 2 oil filter restricted
(1097)
Fault No. 1100:

$h: Fan drive oil filter for oil cooler 2 restricted
(1103)
179
Fault No. 1106:

$h:
(1109)
Help:
Fault No. 1112:

$h:
(1115)
Help:
Fault No. 1118:

$h: Electric pilot control system failure
(1121)
Pilot control amplifiers energized with control levers in

neutral position.
Help:
DANGER of phantom movements!
- Check safety relay D32 and K125.
Fault No. 1124: $h: Faulty pressure switch for lubrication of

(1127) PTO gear 1
Open contact of pressure switch B17-1 for PTO-gear 1

Help: lubrication with switched OFF motor.
Fault No. 1130: $h: Faulty pressure switch for lubrication of

(1133) PTO gear 2
Open contact of pressure switch B17-2 for PTO-gear 2

Help: lubrication with switched OFF motor.
Fault No. 1136:

$h: Lubrication system failure of PTO gear 1
(1139)
Oil pressure for lubrication of PTO gear 1 insufficient

Help: - Check lubrication oil pump and connected lines.
(indicated by B17-1)
Fault No. 1142:

$h: Lubrication system failure of PTO gear 2
(1145)
Oil pressure for lubrication of PTO gear 2 insufficient.

Help: - Check lubrication oil pump and connected lines.
(indicated by B17-2)
180
Fault No. 1148:

$h: Pump back-up pressure X4-1 failure
(1151)
Back-up pressure for pumps on motor 1 insufficient

Help:
- Check valve Y102-1.
Fault No. 1154:

$h: Pump back-up pressure X4-2 failure
(1157)
Back-up pressure for pumps on motor 2 insufficient
Help:
- Check valve Y102-2.
Fault No. 1160: $h: Faulty pressure switch for pump back-up pressure
(1163) X4
One of the pressure switches B97 is open with switched

Help: off motor.
- Check pressure switches B97-1 and B97-2.
Fault No. 1166:

$h:
(1169)
Help:
Fault No. 1172:

$h:
(1175)
Help:
Fault No. 1178:

$h: Temperature in cab base too high
(1181)
Temperature in cab base too high.

Help: - Check air conditioning and ventilation.
- Check thermostat 6B1.
Fault No. 1184: $h: Temperature in high tension switch cabinet too
(1187) high
Temperature in high tension switch cabinet too high.

Help: - Check air conditioning and ventilation.
- Check thermostat 6B2.
181
Fault No. 1190:

$h: Faulty monitor channel for X1.1-pressure
(1193)
Pressure pick up B85-1 for the X1.1-pressure shows inad-

Fault No. 1196:

$h: Faulty monitor channel for pilot pressure X2
(1199)
Pressure pick up B86 for the pilot pressure X2 shows inad-
Fault No. 1202:

$h: Bypass reverse travel cut out by cable drum
(1205)
Help: (indicated by K178, K195)
Fault No. 1208: $h: Travel cut out by cable drum motor, temperature
(1211) too high
- Allow motor to cool down.

Help:
(indicated by K177, K178, K179, K180)
Fault No. 1214: $h: Low - tension control voltage failure at circuit
(1217) breaker 1F6
- Switch on circuit breaker.

Help:
- Rectify short circuit.
Fault No. 1220: $h: Power supply for main motors was / is inerrupted.
(1223) Motors stopped.
Help: Motors stopped by 1K13.
Fault No. 1226:

$h: Inverted rectifier 1U1 reports malfunction
(1229)
Help:
Fault No. 1232: $h: Shutdown through emergency stop switch 0S36.
(1235)
Emergency stop switch 0S36 in the cab actuated.

Help:
- Find cause
182
Fault No. 1238: $h: Maintenance safety switch 1S58 in machinery

(1241) house actuated.
Help: - Find cause
Fault No. 1244: $h: Faulty monitor channel for central lube system
(1247) level.
Level sensor B108 shows inadmissible values.
Help:
- Check monitor channel and sensor.
Fault No. 1250: $h: Bucket motion switched off due to lubrication
(1253) system failure
Automatic lubrication suspended for 4 hours.

Help: - Perform manually actuated lubrication.
- Repair lubrication system.
Fault No. 1256: $h: Faulty switch hydraulic oil level or lack of hydraulic
(1259) oil
Stop the motors.

Help: - Check level sensor B4 and B50.
- Check hydraulic oil level.
Fault No. 1262: $h: Lack of hydraulic oil !

(1265) Fill up hydraulic oil !
Hydraulic oil level too low.

Help:
- Fill up hydraulic oil. (indicated by B4)
Fault No. 1268: $h: Faulty monitor channel for level swing ring gear-
(1271) lube system.
Level sensor B109 shows inadmissible values.

Help:
- Check monitor channel and sensor.
Fault No. 1274:

$h: Problems pump control.
(1277)
Problem in the pump control.

Help: - If the fault further exist, inform service. (indicated by
E32.32)
183
Fault No. 1280: $h: Shutdown through emergency stop switch 0S33C.
(1283)
Help: Emergency stop 0S33C in pump compartment actuated.
- Find cause
Fault No. 1286:

$h:
(1289)
Help:
Fault No. 1292:

$h:
(1295)
Help:
Fault No. 1298:

$h:
(1301)
Help:
Fault No. 1304:

$h:
(1307)
Help:
GROUP 3 Information Message Texts of message pages No.

1310 - 1319 will be stored
Information No. 1310: (1311) ? 250 h Maintenance performed
184
GROUP 4
Information Message Texts of message pages No. 1320 -
1535 will not be stored
Information No. 1320: # Hydraulic oil not at operating temp. !

(1321) Operate with reduced power !
Information No. 1322:

# Swing gear house brake ON
(1323)
Information No. 1324: ? Motor 2 start h:

(1325) (This message will be stored).
Information No. 1326: ? Motor 2 stop h:

Information No. 1328: # Wait ! Start of motor 1 blocked

(1329) during one minute after start of motor 2.
Information No. 1330: # Wait ! Start of motor 2 blocked

(1331) during one minute after start of motor 1.

# Evaluation switched off.
(1333)
Information No. 1334: ? Motor 1 start h:

Information No. 1336: ? Motor 1 stop h:


# SERVICE: Central lubrication system.
(1339)

(1341)

# SERVICE: Swing ring gear lubrication system.
(1343)
185

# Messages switched OFF
(1345)

#
(1347)

# Trucks : @ C05
(1349)
# Pilot control switched OFF.

Safety lever in locked position or ladder down
(1352)
(indicated by S28)
# Switch off wiper

Remove lower wiper
(1356)
Push >QUI< button
# Emergency shut-down switch 0S33D in the

power house was actuated.
(1360)
Unlock before restarting.
# Emergency shut-down switch 0S33B at the

main control valves was actuated.
(1364)
# Emergency shut-down switch 0S36 in the

cab was actuated.
(1368)
# Maintenance safety switch 1S58 in the

machinery house was actuated.
(1372)
# Start lock, Motor 1 temperature too high. Motor

Information No. 1374: must not be started.
(1376) - Allow motor to cool down.
- Check motor protection relay 0F4-1.
Information No. 1378: # Swing ring gear lube system grease container
(1380) on reserve. - Replace or fill grease container.
186
# Central lube system grease container on

reserve.
(1384)
Replace or fill grease container.
# Hydraulic oil below operating temperature!

Pre-heat hydraulic oil or warm up
(1388)
with reduced power.
# Emergency shut-down switch 0S33A at the

machinery house door was actuated.
(1392)
# Emergency shut-down switch 0S33C in the

pump compartment was actuated.
(1396)
# Start lock, Motor 2 temperature too high. Motor

Motor must not be started.
(1400)
- Allow motor to cool down.
- Check motor protection relay 0F4-2.
Information No. 1402: # Forward travel cut out by cable drum.

(1404) (indicated by K177)
Information No. 1406: # Faulty switch S85 -> only upper wiper
(1408) -> Check switch S85
Information No. 1410: # Reverse travel cut out by cable drum.

Information No. 1414: # Reverse travel left track cut out by cable drum.
Information No. 1422: # Reverse travel right track cut out by cable drum.
187
Information No. 1426: # Central lube system.

(1428) manually released:
Information No. 1430: # Faulty switch S86 -> switch off wiper
(1432) Check switch S86 -> push >QUI< button
Information No. 1434: # Swing ring gear lube system.

(1436) manually released:
Information No. 1440: # Remark to Maintenance calls.

(1445) The maintenance calls integrated in the ECS system
are to be performed according to the maintenance sec-
tion in the operation and maintenance manual.
The routine visual checks, lubrication work and motor
maintenance are not called up. Please pay attention to
the Service Literature.
Information No. 1450: # Initial 250 h Maintenance

(1455) Perform initial 250 h Maintenance.
# Initial 1000 h Maintenance

Perform initial 1000 h Maintenance.
(1465)
Perform also the 250 h/ 500 h Maintenance.
Information No. 1470: # Periodic 250 h Maintenance

(1475) Perform periodic 250 h Maintenance
# Periodic 500 h Maintenance

Perform periodic 500 h Maintenance.
(1485)
Perform also the 250 h Maintenance.

(1495)
Perform also the 250 h/ 500 h Maintenance.

(1505)
Perform also the 250 h/ 500 h/ 1000 h Maintenance.
188

(1515)
Perform also the 250 h/ 500 h/ 1000 h Maintenance.
189
3.5 CAMERA SYSTEM WITH MONITOR OPERATION
3.5 CAMERA SYSTEM WITH MONITOR
190
OPERATION 3.5 CAMERA SYSTEM WITH MONITOR
3.5.1 LOCATION OF MONITOR AND CONTROL UNIT
(1) Monitor for viewing the cable guide
(2) Control unit for monitor
Adjust the position of the monitor
The monitor is fastened by means of a ball joint and can be

adjusted in any direction. To adjust the position of the monitor
loosen the clamping screw at the ball joint housing and move the
monitor into a suitable position. Retighten the clamping screw
securely by hand.
Refer to page 193 for operating instructions of the monitors.
191
192
Operating the Monitors

LCD Monitor -D-
(1) Power LED. With ignition key in ON position the LED lights up to indicate the stand-by modus
(2) Power ON - OFF switch. This switch is used for switching the display on and off
(3) Remote control sensor. The monitor can also be operated with a remote controller. To operate
the monitor point the remote controller towards the sensor.
(4) Brightness sensor. (Day/Night automatic brightness control) The brightness of the display is
automatically adjusted according to the light conditions. This function is only available with Day/
Night switch (9) in ON position
(5) Camera selection button. This function is not used
(6) Menu button. By pressing this button the selectable menu functions appear on the monitor. The
menu will disappear after 5 seconds if no further button is actuated. Select the desired function
with buttons (8) CH:
● SCALE -Evaluation scale- (Not used)
● CA1 -Mirror-
● AUTO TIME (Not used)
● COLOR
● BRIGHTNESS
● CONTRAST
(7) Volume button. This function is not used

(8) CH-Menu selection buttons. Displayed menu functions can be selected with these arrow buttons
(9) Day/Night switch ON - OFF. Switch for automatic brightness control
(10) Input terminal. Connector for control unit cable

(11) Rail for monitor bracket. Adjustable
Ajustments of the Monitor
1. SCALE CONTROL (Not used)
2. CAMERA MIRROR CONTROL
Selection of mirror or normal image.
1. Press the MENU button (6).
2. Select CA1 (MIRROR) or CA1 (NORMAL) with buttons CH.
3. Choose the desired function with button CA. SEL.
4. Press the MENU button.
3. AUTO TIME CONTROL (Not used)
193
194
Adjustments of the Monitor (continued)
4. Color setting
2. Select menu item COLOR with the buttons CH and acknowl-

edge the selection with button CA.SEL.
3. Adjust the desired color by using the buttons CH.
4. Press button MENU to finish the set-up.
5. Brightness setting
2. Select menu item BRIGHT with the buttons CH and acknowl-

edge the selection with button CA.SEL.
3. Adjust the desired brightness by using the buttons CH.
6. Contrast setting
2. Select menu item CONTRAST with the buttons CH and

acknowledge the selection with button CA.SEL.
3. Adjust the desired contrast by using the buttons CH.

Control Unit -E-
(1) Video input, e.g. for DVD player or Video recorder (if utilized)
(2) Audio input -L- (if utilized)
(3) Audio input -R- (if utilized)
(4) Video output -L- (if utilized)

(5) Audio output -R- (if utilized)
(6) Audio output -R- (if utilized)
(7) Power input plug

(8) Connector cable to monitor
(9) Plug socket for additional camera 3 (not applicable)
(10) Control switch for camera 2 and 3 (not applicable)

(11) Plug socket for additional camera 2 (not applicable)
(12) Plug socket for the utilized camera
195
196
Arrangement of the Cameras
(A) Camera mounted on underside of superstructure to

observe cable guide.
(B) Cable guide
(1) Camera bracket
(2) Camera
● View angle horizontal: 70°
● View angle vertical: 50°
Never remove the lens glass from the camera. The housing is
filled with nitrogen which prevents moisture from getting into the
camera. The nitrogen would escape if the lens glass is being
removed.
197
3.6 OPERATING THE HEATER, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING OPERATION
3.6 OPERATING THE HEATER, VENTILATION AND

AIR CONDITIONING
Digital Display
Air Flow Control
● For defrosting the windshield close the slide in the seat base.
The whole air flow is now directed to the windshield.
● To direct the air flow to your feet, open the slide in the seat
base.
198
OPERATION 3.6 OPERATING THE HEATER, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING
199
3.7 MACHINERY HOUSE OPERATION
3.7 MACHINERY HOUSE
200
OPERATION 3.7 MACHINERY HOUSE
3.7.1 EMERGENCY MOTOR SHUTDOWN SWITCHES
(1) Pulling chains for emergency shut down from ground

man (special equipment). When one of the chains (1) is
being pulled down for emergency shut down of both
motors, the Operator will be informed by the following
message, displayed on the ECS screen:
" # Motor shut down has been actuated from ground
man"
(2) Emergency motor shutdown switch (S33A) on radiator

door
(3) Emergency motor shutdown switch (S33B) at the main

control valves
(4) Emergency motor shutdown switch (S33C) in pump

compartment on center post
(5) Emergency motor shutdown switch (S33D) at the coun-

terweight
(A) Push button of emergency shutdown switches (2, 3, 4

and 5) for stopping the motors
(B) Release button for emergency shut down switch (if so

equipped)
WARNING
● In case of emergency push in the button (A) to stop both
motors.
● Do not use the emergency shutdown switches for normal

stopping procedure.
NOTICE
● For restarting, first push in release button (B). On
switches without button (B) pull out button (A) and then
start the motors in the normal way at control panel in the
operator’s cab. The motors can not be started with but-
ton (A) in depressed position.
● When one of the Shutdown switches (2 - 5) is activated,

the ECS display informs the Operator by a corresponding
message.
201
202
3.7.2 SAFETY SWITCH FOR MAINTENANCE
(6) Maintenance safety switch for start prevention of the motors
CAUTION
Before beginning any maintenance operations set the
safety switch (6) to *0* position to prevent starting of the
motors during maintenance. Secure this position by insert-
ing a padlock into the holes of the safety switch. Up to three
padlocks can be attached.
Machinery house doors
(7) Front door
(8) Center door
(9) Rear door
(10) Light switch for interior lighting of the machinery house
(11) Plug socket 24V DC
(12) Welding socket 400V
NOTICE
Make sure that all machinery house doors are securely
closed before starting the motors.
203
204
3.7.3 CONTROL AND FILTER PANEL OF REAR- AND FRONT POWER UNIT
(Rr.1) Control and filter panel of rear power unit, motor 1
(Fr.2) Control and filter panel of front power unit, motor 2
(1) Change over valve for operation mode of pump con-

trol system for rear power unit, motor 1.
(2) Change over valve for operation mode of pump con-
trol system for front power unit, motor 2.
(3 Not used.
(4) Pressure oil filter for pump distributor gear PTO 1

lubricating oil. Filter restriction monitored by differen-
tial pressure switch B27-1.
(5) Pressure oil filter for fan drive motor of hydraulic oil
cooler 1. Filter restriction monitored by differential
pressure switch B28-1.
(6) Pressure oil filter for pilot- and pump control oil cir-
cuit. Filter restriction monitored by differential pres-
sure switch B22.
(7) Not used

(8) Pressure oil filter for pump distributor gear PTO 2
lubricating oil. Filter restriction monitored by differen-
tial pressure switch B27-2.
(9) Pressure oil filter for fan drive motor of hydraulic oil
cooler 2. Filter restriction monitored by differential
pressure switch B28-2.
Operation Modes of Pump Regulation System
The standard operation mode of the pump control system is the

Electronic Operation Mode.
For testing purposes the pump control system can be changed to
the hydraulic operation mode. In case of a failure in the electronic
control system the hydraulic operation mode can also be used for
continuing operation.
The lever positions for electronic and hydraulic operation mode

are marked with corresponding symbols at levers (1) and (2).
205
3.8 MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCH CABINET IN CAB BASE OPERATION
3.8 MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCH CABINET IN CAB BASE
206
OPERATION 3.8 MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCH CABINET IN CAB BASE
3.8.1 COMPONENTS OF THE MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCH CABINET
WARNING
● Access to the medium voltage area for authorized ser-
vice staff only.
● The local safety regulations must be observed.
(1) Cab base door. Keep the door always locked, access to the cab base for
authorized personnel only.
(2) Lock rod for locking the cab base door in open position
(3) Steel cylinder filled with extinguishing gas Carbon Dioxide. Only on machines
equipped with a fire suppression system.
(4) Switch board "X2". For details refer to page 209.
(5) Monitor and control panel. For details refer to page 219.
(6) Switch board medium voltage. For details refer to page 221.
(1U1) Inverted rectifier. The inverted rectifier is protected by one 2.0AT fuse at the
(+) terminal and one 16A circuit breaker at the terminal no. (11). The controls
and monitors of the inverted rectifier are located on the panel (5). See
page 219 for details. For more information of the inverted rectifier refer to the
separate Manual "Inverter 1500VA 24V/110V 50Hz" filed in volume 2 binder.
(1U2) Battery chargers for main batteries. The battery charger is switched ON and
and OFF with the switch on the front panel of the battery charger. For operating
(1U4) instructions refer to the separate Users Manual "MASTERVOLT" battery
charger filed in volume 2 binder.
(1U3) Battery charger for emergency lighting system. The battery charger is
switched ON and OFF with the switch on the front panel of the battery
charger. For operating instructions refer to the separate Users Manual "MAS-
TERVOLT" battery charger filed in volume 2 binder.
(E32) Electronic control module (ECM) of the pump control system MC7. The data
link adapter for connecting an electronic tool to the pump control module
(E32) is located in the operator’s cab on the operator’s console.
(M3) Signal horn compressor with signal horn

(7S2) Light switch
(7H1) Cab base lighting
REMARK
The units (1U1, 1U2, 1U3 and 1U4) are located below the
floor plates in the cab base.
207
208
3.8.2 SWITCH BOARD (X2) IN CAB BASE
(1) Switch board (X2)
(2) Programmable Logic Controller (E6)
(H29) Hour meter for travel operation

(H63) Indicator lamp electronic pump control system
(MC7) active and program information
(H138) This lamp pulses if there is a failure in the electronic

pump control system (MC7)
(S27) Emergency By-pass switch for the shutdown func-

tion of the PLC (E6). If an automatic shutdown is ini-
tiated by Shovel systems, with a dangerous situation
for man or machine, which needs the Shovel to be
operable to over-come the dangerous situation,
actuate this switch to override the shutdown function
of the system and to enable a restart of the motors.
NOTICE
This switch can not override motor initiated
shutdowns.
CAUTION
As soon as the immediate situation of danger is
over, shutdown the unit. Correct the fault that
caused the shut down and re-set the Emergency
By-pass switch (S27).
(S155) Service Switch for ”QMIN” and ”QMAX” Control

of the Main Hydraulic Pumps
REMARK
The service switch (S155) is used for testing and
adjusting procedures of the hydraulic system and
should only be operated through authorized service
personnel.
Switch positions:
0 - Normal operating position

1 - Qmax position: In this position the Qmin control is
by-passed and the main pumps move to maximum
delivery position.
2 - Qmin position: In this position the main pumps
remain in Qmin position i.e. minimum oil delivery to
the hydraulic system.
NOTICE
Make sure that the switch (S155) is set to -0- position as soon
as the testing and adjusting procedures of the hydraulic sys-
tem are finished.
209
210
Emergency Indication of Operating Conditions
The ECS system is equipped with an emergency indication via

LED’s on the Programmable Logic Controller ”PLC” (E6), illustra-
tion Z25261.
In case of a malfunction of the text display in the operator’s cab,

the LED’s on the ”PLC” indicating failures in vital operating sys-
tems of the Shovel.
The following faults are indicated:
Fault: LED No.:
The ECS system is by-passed (By-pass switch S27 actuated) H30
Start of motor 1 and/or motor 2 blocked by one or more of the six high
H31 *)
pressure filters.
Start of both motors blocked, resp. motor shut down,

H37
due to closed main shut-off (gate) valve hydraulic tank
Faulty monitor channel for hydraulic oil temperature H38
Emergency shut down switch actuated H116 *)

Motor shutdown from ground man (if so equipped) H135
Start of motor 1 and/or motor 2 blocked due to lubrication system failure of

H136 *)
PTO gear
Too low hydraulic oil level! Stop the motors H137
*) LED with a flashing diagnostic code
The LED ”H31” monitors all six high pressure filters. LED ”H116”
monitors all five Emergency shutdown switches and H136 moni-
tors the lubrication system of both PTO gear boxes. If a failure
condition occurs, the respective LED will begin flashing out a
diagnostic code for identification of the concerned filter, emer-
gency switch or PTO gear box. If more than one filter, switch or
gear box, send a failure signal at the same time, the respective
LED will always show the diagnostic code of that unit with the low-
est number. Refer to page 213 for description of the diagnostic
codes flashed out by LED ”H31”,”H116” and ”H136”.
211
212
High Pressure Filter "HPF"

Identification Codes of LED H31
The LED ”H31”, illust. Z25261, monitors all six high pressure fil-
ters. If a failure condition of a high pressure filter occurs, the LED
”H31” will begin flashing out a diagnostic code for identification of
the concerned filter. If more than one filter send a failure signal at
the same time, the LED will always show the diagnostic code of
that filter with the lowest number.
High Pressure Filter "HPF" number:
Code HPF #1 1 1 1 1
0.5s 2s
Code HPF #2 1 2 1 2 1 2
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 2s
Code HPF #3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 2s
Code HPF #4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 2s
Code HPF #5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 2s
Code HPF #6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 2s
Example: Identification Code for High Pressure Filter #4:

When the differential pressure switch of high pressure filter #4
sends the signal ”Filter restricted”, the LED H31 will flash four
times at regular intervals of 0.5 seconds and then after two sec-
onds pause time will start again flashing four times at regular
intervals of 0.5 seconds and so on.
The number of the four 0.5 seconds interval flashing groups cor-
responds to the number of the high pressure filters respectively to
the number of the main pumps.
213
214
Emergency shutdown switches - Identification

Codes of LED H116
The LED ”H116”, illustration Z25261 monitors all five emergency

shutdown switches. If an Emergency shutdown switch is actu-
ated, the LED ”H116” will begin flashing out a diagnostic code for
identification of the concerned switch. If more than one switch
send a signal at the same time, the LED will always show the
diagnostic code of that switch with the lowest number.
Emergency shutdown switches:
Code#1 0S33A 1 1 1 1
0.5s 2s
Code#2 0S33B 1 2 1 2 1 2
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 2s
Code#3 0S33C 1 2 3 1 2 3 1
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 2s
Code#4 0S33D 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 2s
Code#5 0S36 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 2s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s
0S33A Emergency shutdown switch at the power house.

0S33B Emergency shutdown switch opposite the main control
valves.
0S33C Emergency shutdown switch in pump compartment.
0S33D Emergency shutdown switch in rear motor compartment.
0S36 Emergency shutdown switch on instrument panel in the
cab.
Example: Identification Code for Emergency shutdown

switch #4 (0S33D):
When the Emergency shutdown switch #4 (0S33D) sends the sig-

nal ”Emergency shut-down switch 0S33D in the rear motor com-
partment was actuated”, the LED H116 will flash four times at
regular intervals of 0.5 seconds and then after two seconds pause
time will start again flashing four times at regular intervals of 0.5
seconds and so on.
The number of the 0.5 seconds interval flashing group corre-
sponds to the number of each Emergency shutdown switch.
215
216
Lubrication System failure of PTO gear boxes

- Identification Codes of LED H136 -
The LED ”H136”, illustration Z25261 monitors both PTO gear

boxes. If a failure condition of a PTO gear box occurs, the LED
”H136” will begin flashing out a diagnostic code for identification
of the concerned gear box. If more than one gear box send a sig-
nal at the same time, the LED will always show the diagnostic
code of that PTO gear with the lowest number.
PTO gear boxes:
Code #1 PTO1 1 1 1 1
0.5s 2s 0.5s 2s 0.5s 2s 0.5s 2s
Code #2 PTO2 1 2 1 2 1 2
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 2s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 2s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 2s
PTO 1 Indicated by B17-1
PTO 2 Indicated by B17-2
Example:
Identification Code for PTO gear box #2 :
When the PTO gear box #2 sends the signal ” Shutdown: Lubrica-
tion system failure of PTO gear 2”, the LED H136 will flash two
times at regular intervals of 0.5 seconds and then after two sec-
onds pause time will start again flashing two times at regular inter-
vals of 0.5 seconds and so on.
The number of the 0.5 seconds interval flashing group corre-
sponds to the number of each PTO gear box.
217
218
3.8.3 MONITOR AND CONTROL PANEL IN CAB BASE
(1) Ammeter (1P1)
(2) Voltmeter (1P8)
(3) LED Inverted rectifier 1U1 in operation (1H1)
(4) LED Inverted rectifier 1U1 DC input under-voltage (1H4)
(5) LED Inverted rectifier 1U1 AC output under-voltage (1H7)

(6) Main switch for inverted rectifier 1U1 (1S2)
(7) LED Inverted rectifier 1U1 fault (1H2)
(8) LED Inverted rectifier 1U1 DC input over-voltage (1H3)

(9) LED Inverted rectifier 1U1 AC output over-voltage (1H6)
(10) LED Inverted rectifier 1U1 excessive temperature (1H5)
(11) LED Inverted rectifier 1U1 overload (1H8)
(22) Temperature sensor (2B6A) activates the air conditioning when the temperature
exceeds +20°C (factory setting).
(13) Temperature sensor (6B1) activates the warning light (3) on the LED monitor (6V2)
when the temperature in the cab base rises above +50°C (factory setting). The LED
monitor is shown on page 221.
(14) Humidity sensor (2B7A) activates the air conditioning when the air humidity
exceeds 70% (factory setting).
REMARK
For more information of the inverted rectifier refer to the sepa-
rate Technical Manual *Inverter 1500VA 24V/110V 50Hz* filed in
volume 2 binder.
219
220
3.8.4 SWITCH BOARD - MEDIUM VOLTAGE
(1) Switch board
(OF4-1) Motor protection relay for main drive motor 1
(OF4-2) Motor protection relay for main drive motor 2

Refer to the separate Instruction Manual *Motor Protection
Relay SPAM 150 C* in volume no 2 binder for operation and
maintenance instructions.
1Q1A Power switch medium voltage feeding, setting 45A
1Q1B Power switch medium voltage feeding, setting 10A
(6V1) LED monitor unit
LED number and meaning:

1 - Main transformer temperature too high
2 - Wrong direction of rotation
3 - Overcurrent Motor 1
4 - Overcurrent Motor 2
5 - Reserve
6 - Motor 1 winding temperature too high, Trip
7 - Motor 2 winding temperature too high, Trip
(6V2) LED monitor unit

LED number and meaning
1 - Restart lock after voltage failure Motor 1
2 - Restart lock after voltage failure Motor 2
3 - Temperature in medium voltage switch cabinet too high
4 - Temperature in high voltage switch cabinet too high
5 - Motor 1 bearing temperature too high, Trip
6 - Motor 2 bearing temperature too high, Trip
7 - Reserve
221
3.9 HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCH CABINET OPERATION
3.9 HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCH CABINET
222
OPERATION 3.9 HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCH CABINET
High Voltage Switch Cabinet
WARNING
● Access to the high voltage area for authorized personnel
only.
● Before opening the door of the high voltage switch cabi-

net make sure the main power supply from the power sta-
tion is switched off.
(1) High voltage switch cabinet door

(2) Lockable flap for load cut-off switch
(3) Key for load cut-off switch actuator, keep in the

switch cabinet.
(4) Actuator shaft of the load cut-off switch 0Q1
0F2 Fuse 16A
0F1.1 Fuse 160A, motor 1

0F1.2 Fuse 160A, motor 2
0K1.1 Main contactor, motor 1

0k1.2 Main contactor, motor 2
0T1.1 Current transformer, motor 1

0T1.2
0T1.3
0T2.1 Current transformer, motor 2

0T2.2
0T2.3
WARNING
Make sure to lock up door (1) and flap (2) with padlocks to
prevent unauthorized access to the high voltage area.
223
3.10 CHECKS BEFORE STARTING THE MAIN DRIVE MOTORS OPERATION
3.10 CHECKS BEFORE STARTING THE MAIN DRIVE

MOTORS
224
OPERATION 3.10 CHECKS BEFORE STARTING THE MAIN DRIVE MOTORS
CAUTION
Before starting the motors, make sure that no one will be
endangered when starting the motors.
Walk-around Inspection
Check for leakage, loose parts and overall security.
Refer to the maintenance section 4. for the daily inspection items.
Power Supply
Make sure the correct power supply (6.9 kV, 50 Hz, 3-Phase) is
applied.
Main Drive Electric Motor
Read the separate Operation- and Maintenance Manual for the

main drive electric motor. Observe the starting and operating
instructions.
The Motor Manual is part of Volume no. 2 Binder.
Start Transformer (if so equipped)
Read the separate Operation- and Maintenance Manual delivered

from the manufacturer of the Start Transformer.
Observe the starting instructions.
Load Cut-Off Switch (3), illust. (Z 22659)
Set this switch to operating position, using key (4).
Close flap (1) and lock-up with padlock (2). Store the key (4) in the
switch cabinet.
Make sure the doors of the high voltage switch cabinet and of the
cab base are closed and all emergency motor shut-off switches
are in released position.
Lock up switch cabinet door with padlock (5).
225
3.10 CHECKS BEFORE STARTING THE MAIN DRIVE MOTORS OPERATION
226
OPERATION 3.10 CHECKS BEFORE STARTING THE MAIN DRIVE MOTORS
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM - CHECK OIL LEVEL
General Information
The hydraulic oil level in the main oil reservoir fluctuates depend-
ing on the oil temperature and the position of the loader attach-
ment (hydraulic cylinders retracted / extended).
(2) Hydraulic oil level sight gauge

(3) Oil level plate
(4) Oil filler plug
For checking the oil level lower the attachment (backhoe or bot-
tom dump bucket) onto the ground in a position as shown in the
illustration Z22878.
Depending on type of attachment and the present oil temperature,

select the applying oil level range on plate (3). Be sure to use the
correct marking on oil level plate (3).
Add hydraulic oil as necessary.
Machinery House Doors
Make sure all machinery house doors are securely closed before
starting the motors.
OPERATOR’S SEAT ADJUSTMENT
Before operating the Shovel adjust the seat and mirrors for Oper-
ators maximum comfort, visibility, and complete control of the
Shovel.
CAUTION
Use seat belt in accordance with the local safety regulations
and laws.
227
3.11 STARTING THE MAIN DRIVE MOTORS OPERATION
3.11 STARTING THE MAIN DRIVE MOTORS
228
OPERATION 3.11 STARTING THE MAIN DRIVE MOTORS
NOTICE
Before starting read the Motor Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual. Observe the instructions for starting
the motor.
WARNING
● Start the motors from the operator’s seat only.
● Before each starting make sure that all controls are in

neutral position.
● Be sure to sound the signal horn before starting to make

your intention clear.
CAUTION
Before starting the motors and again before starting work,
pay attention to the hydraulic oil temperature. Refer to para-
graph >Hydraulic Oil Warm-up< in this section.
Starting Procedure, illustration Z25528
REMARK
Start the motors with the safety lock lever (10) in the fully rear
LOCKED position. When both motors are running move the
safety lock lever (10) fully to the front in FREE position. In the
FREE position of the safety lever the pilot control system is in
working order.
Start the motors one after another, e.g. first rear motor -1- then,
after one minute pause time, the front motor -2-. Both motors are
started in the same way.
1. Insert battery main switch keys and turn to operating position.
2. Switch on the load cut-off switch, see page 224.
3. Insert key into the switch (6), illustration Z25528 and turn to
operating position. The warning buzzer (7) must give an
acoustic test signal. If the buzzer fails to function, corrective
action must be taken.
4. Observe ECS display (1). Normally the basic display appears

on screen (1). If a FAULT message or INFORMATION item is
displayed, proceed according to section "ELECTRONIC
MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM ECS" on page 86.
5. Sound the signal horn (9).
6. Start the motors by turning starter switches (4 and 2).

Wait one minute between starting of motor 1 and 2.
229
230
After starting observe the following:
The ECS System monitors the Shovel’s functions and provides

information about the appropriate operational data.
If a FAULT message is displayed on screen (1), illustration
Z25528 the acoustic warning signal (7) will sound simultaneously
for approximately 1 second. In such a case proceed according to
the instructions of the ECS system on page 86.
Warning buzzer (7) will sound continuously when the hydraulic oil
level is too low. In this case, stop the motors, locate and correct
the cause immediately. Fill up hydraulic oil to the correct level.
Automatic motor shut down system (safety chain)
The motor(s) will be stopped automatically if a serious trouble

condition occurs. The operator will be informed about the trouble
condition by a corresponding message displayed on screen (1).
Emergency By-pass Switch for the ECS- Shut-down Func-

tion.
The unit is equipped with an Emergency By-pass Switch for the

ECS-system.
This switch is located on the *X2* switch board in the cab base
compartment and marked with *S27*.
If an automatic shut-down of the Shovel happens, with a danger-
ous situation for man or machine, which needs the Shovel to be
operable to overcome the dangerous situation, actuate this switch
to override the shut-down function of the system and to enable a
restart of the motors.
NOTICE
This switch can not override motor initiated shutdowns.
CAUTION
As soon as the immediate situation of danger is over, shut
down the unit. Correct the fault that caused the shut down
and re-set the emergency by-pass switch.
231
232
Hydraulic oil warm-up
● On machines without hydraulic oil pre-heating system:

DO NOT start the motors if the ambient temperature (oil tem-
perature) is below the starting temperature shown in column
"1" of the hydraulic oil viscosity chart on page 234 in this sec-
tion.
● On machines with hydraulic oil pre-heating system:

Before starting the motor, warm-up the hydraulic oil to the
starting temperature shown in column "1" of the hydraulic oil
viscosity chart.
Messages displayed with hydraulic oil too cold:
Hydraulic oil far below operating temp.

Fault
Wait for warm-up phase!
The machine was taken into operation although the

Help: start viscosity was not attained.
- Preheat hydraulic oil!
# Hydraulic oil not at operating temp.!

Information
Operate with reduced power!
(Main pump delivery 50% of total capacity)
The Shovel is equipped with a ”½ Qmax control circuit for cold

oil” which limits the main pumps oil delivery to approximately
50% of the total capacity as long as the oil temperature has not
reached the minimum operating temperature shown in column ”2”
of the Viscosity and Temperature Chart on page 234.
The pumps will move to maximum delivery position and the mes-
sage will disappear, as soon as the minimum operating tempera-
ture of the hydraulic oil is obtained.
Information # Hydraulic oil below operating temperature!

Pre-heat hydraulic oil or warm up at reduced power.
During the warm-up period, complete several operating cycles of

all hydraulic movements without load. Avoid operation against
limit stops. (high pressure build up).
Work can be started when the minimum operating temperature
shown in column ”2” of the viscosity chart is obtained.
233
Hydraulic Oil Viscosity and Temperature Chart
Rated Starting Operating range

viscosity temperature (100 - 10 cSt)
at 40° C of (max. 1000 cSt)
hydraulic oil grade: -1- -2-
ISO VG °C °C
HLP 22 -20 8 - 55
HLP 32 -14 16 - 70
HLP 46 -6 25 - 80
HLP 68 0 32 - 85
HLP 100 +5 39 - 85
REMARK
The starting and operating temperatures in the above chart
depend on the hydraulic oil viscosity grade used in the system.
See decal in the operator’s cab for viscosity grade of the factory
oil filling.
For example:
Hydraulic system filled with VG 22 viscosity grade oil.
1. Lowest permissible starting temperature (ambient tempera-

ture):
-20° C, see column "1"
2. Operating temperature:
min. + 8° C
max. + 55° C, see column ”2”
234
OPERATION 3.12 MOVING THE SHOVEL
3.12 MOVING THE SHOVEL
3.12.1 TRAVEL CONTROL WITH FOOT PEDALS
NOTICE
Travelling directions with cab in normal working and travel
position i.e. cab above idler wheel. Counter weight above
drive sprockets.
(3L) Left pedal, inside (3R) Right pedal, inside
A Left track forward A Right track forward

B Left track reverse B Right track reverse
235
3.12 MOVING THE SHOVEL OPERATION
WARNING
Be sure to sound the signal horn before starting to drive to
make your intention clear.
Regulate travel speed by depressing the pedals more or less.

Apply swing circle brake as necessary.
On machines with two-speed range travel drive, select normal or

fast speed range according to ground conditions.
For braking the machine release pedals (3L and 3R)
236
OPERATION 3.12 MOVING THE SHOVEL
WARNING
● Travelling on a grade requires special care. Plan your
work so that the Shovel travels up- and downhill parallel
to the grade. The superstructure must be parallel with the
undercarriage and the working attachment must face to
the front in travel direction. The travel gears must be at
the rear in the direction of travel.
● DO NOT use the FAST TRAVEL SPEED RANGE when

travelling on a grade.
● For maximum stability carry the bucket as close to

ground level as possible. Operate the travel control ped-
als sensitively. Avoid jerky acceleration and deceleration
of travel motions. Travel speed must be conform to the
ground conditions.
NOTICE
Two Speed Range Travel Drive
If the Shovel is equipped with a Two Speed Range travel
drive, always use the low speed range when travelling on a
slope.
Never go downhill with fast speed range engaged.
The low travel speed range must also be used during corner-
ing.
PARKING BRAKE
The Shovel is equipped with spring loaded disk type parking

brakes. These brakes engaging and releasing automatically. They
are arranged between the hydraulic motors and travel gears.
When the motor/engine is running the parking brakes are auto-
matically released by pilot oil pressure. With the motor/engine at
standstill the parking brakes are engaged.
TRAVEL ALARM / BACK-UP ALARM
(Special equipment)
The Shovel can be equipped with one of the above alarm sys-
tems. The back-up alarm will sound at reverse travel. The travel
alarm will sound at forward and reverse travel.
237
3.12 MOVING THE SHOVEL OPERATION
3.12.2 TRAVELLING INSTRUCTIONS

● Never travel the Shovel without first making certain that no
one will be endangered.
● Be sure to sound the signal horn before starting to drive to

make your intention clear.
● Before travelling long distances swing the superstructure par-

allel to the undercarriage and apply the swing brake.
● When travelling over inclines and gradients raise the working

attachment only to such a height, that the bucket has suffi-
cient ground clearance.
● Do not travel crossways to slope.
● Whenever possible operate the Shovel with the sprockets to

the rear in the direction of travel.
● On steep terrain make sure that the final drives are at the rear
in relation to travel direction.
● Before travelling over a bridge find out whether its bearing

capacity is sufficient for the operating weight of the Shovel.
● Check for sufficient clearance and use a spotter.
● Pay attention to high voltage lines. On rough terrain observe

movement of the boom.
● Travel speed must conform to local conditions so that the

Shovel can be stopped at any time.
● Change travelling direction only after the machine is stopped.
● In order to avoid damage to track rollers and links, never turn

the undercarriage over ditches and troughs.
● When working attachment is removed, the reduced stability of

the Shovel has to be considered during travelling or slewing
and when basic boom is operated. The stability can be
improved, when the final drives are positioned opposite to
counterweight.
238
OPERATION 3.13 SLEWING AND BRAKING THE SUPERSTRUCTURE
3.13 SLEWING AND BRAKING THE SUPERSTRUCTURE
3.13.1 SLEWING THE SUPERSTRUCTURE
MACHINES WITH "EURO" CONTROL
”L” CCW- Lever (1) to the left ”L”

”N” Neutral position
”R” CW- Lever (1) to the right ”R”
WARNING
● Be sure everyone is in the clear before slewing the super-
structure.
● Never swing or position the attachment or load over per-

sons or vehicle cabs.
● Never allow anyone to walk or work under the Shovel or

load while the Shovel is operating.
239
3.13 SLEWING AND BRAKING THE SUPERSTRUCTURE OPERATION
MACHINES WITH "KMG" CONTROL
”L” CCW- Lever (2) to the left ”L”
”N” Neutral position

”R” CW- Lever (2) to the right ”R”
WARNING
● Be sure everyone is in the clear before slewing the super-
structure.
● Never swing or position the attachment or load over per-

sons or vehicle cabs.
● Never allow anyone to walk or work under the Shovel or

load while the Shovel is operating.
BRAKING THE SUPERSTRUCTURE
Braking of the superstructure from a slewing movement is carried

out first by returning the control lever (1) or (2), illustration Z25223
to the neutral position (N). This procedure can be shortened by
depressing the swing brake pedal (3).
Swing Parking Brake
The parking brake for the swing gears is a spring loaded disk type
brake. This brake is switched ON and OFF with toggle switch (4).
NOTICE
The swing parking brake must only be applied with the
Superstructure at complete standstill. Applying the parking
brake with superstructure still slewing may result in severe
damage to the brake.
WARNING
● Use the swing parking brake only in an emergency situa-
tion for stopping the rotating superstructure.
● If the parking brake has been used for emergency stop-

ping, it is necessary to shut down the Excavator and to
have the parking brake of each swing gear inspected and
repaired if necessary. Contact your Komatsu dealer for
support.
240
OPERATION 3.13 SLEWING AND BRAKING THE SUPERSTRUCTURE
Switch Positions, illustration Z25223
● ”0” Parking brake OFF
● ”1” Parking brake ON
Applying the Parking Brake
Pull out toggle switch (4) against spring force and move down to
position ”1”.
Releasing the Parking Brake
Move up toggle switch (4) to position ”0”. In this position the

switch is automatically pulled down by spring force.
NOTICE
Be sure to release the parking brake before slewing the
superstructure.
Hydraulic Swing Brake actuated by hydraulic

access Ladder
The hydraulic swing brake will be applied automatically when the

access ladder is not in its completely lifted position.
Important Instructions for Slewing the Superstruc-

ture
WARNING
● DO NOT swing over persons or over the unprotected cab
of a truck.
● DO NOT level the ground in front of the Shovel by turning

superstructure back and forth.
● Never swing against the wall of a pit. First raise the

attachment out of the pit and then start rotating the
superstructure.
● Start digging only after finishing the slewing operation.
241
3.14 WORKING WITH THE ATTACHMENT OPERATION
3.14 WORKING WITH THE ATTACHMENT
3.14.1 MACHINES EQUIPPED WITH ”EURO” CONTROL SYSTEM
NOTICE
The illustrations show a typical construction of control stand
and working attachment.
However, the shown operation - and working movements
apply to this machine.
BACKHOE
LH control lever(1) RH control lever (2)
E Extending stick A Lowering boom
F Retracting stick B Lifting boom
C Filling bucket
(roll back)
D Emptying bucket
(roll forward)
FACE SHOVEL
LH control lever (1) RH control lever (2)
E Extending stick A Lowering boom
F Retracting stick B Lifting boom
C Filling bucket
(roll forward)
D Emptying bucket
(roll back)
NOTICE
The raised working attachment can also be lowered with the
motor at standstill. If, for example, the motor stalls with the
working attachment in a raised position, lowering of the
working attachment is possible by moving control lever (2) to
position (A). The necessary oil pressure for shifting the
spools of the main control valves is provided by a pressure
accumulator in the pilot oil circuit. After stopping the motor,
relieve the pressure in the hydraulic system.
For more information → See "STOPPING THE MAIN

242
OPERATION 3.14 WORKING WITH THE ATTACHMENT
3.14.2 MACHINES EQUIPPED WITH ”KMG” CONTROL SYSTEM
NOTICE
The illustrations show a typical construction of control stand
However, the shown operation - and working movements
BACKHOE
L.H. control lever (1) R.H. control lever (2)
A Lowering boom E Extending stick
B Lifting boom F Retracting stick
Filling bucket
C
(roll back)
Emptying bucket
D
(roll forward)
FACE SHOVEL
L.H. control lever (1) R.H. control lever (2)
A Lowering boom E Extending stick
B Lifting boom F Retracting stick
Emptying bucket
C
(roll back)
Filling bucket
D
(roll forward)
NOTICE
The raised working attachment can also be lowered with the
motor at standstill. If, for example, the motor stalls with the
working attachment in a raised position, lowering of the
working attachment is possible by moving control lever (1) to
position (A). The necessary oil pressure for shifting the
spools of the main control valves is provided by a pressure
accumulator in the pilot oil circuit. After stopping the motor,
relieve the pressure in the hydraulic system.

243
3.14.3 BOTTOM DUMP BUCKET
NOTICE
The illustration shows a typical construction of control stand
However, the shown operation- and working movements
OPERATING THE BUCKET CLAM
G Closing the bottom dump bucket:

Depress LH pedal (4)
H Opening the bottom dump bucket:

Depress RH pedal (5)
CAUTION
As soon as the bucket is completely closed, release pedal
(4). Otherwise the pressure relief valve of the bucket closing
circuit will open resulting in unnecessary loading of the
hydraulic system.
CAUTION
DO NOT use the bucket clam for loosening or removing
anchored rocks or other solid objects (illust. Z 19984 and Z
19985), since such operations may result in severe damage
to the clam pivot bearings.
244
3.14.4 DROP BALL OPERATION
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING
● Make sure all safety devices are correctly installed on
your machine.
● Always walk-around and look for hazards before you

operate your machine in the work area.
● Consult the supervisor of the job site for instructions

concerning safe operation in the work area.
● Know the rules for movement of people and machines on

the job site. Follow the instructions of the supervisor.
● Before starting drop ball operation, clear area of other

persons and sound the signal horn. Stop drop ball opera-
tion when other persons approaching to the work area.
● The drop ball must never be placed loosely in the bucket.

Always pick-up the drop ball at its greatest circumfer-
ence, see detail (A) in the illustration number (6).
● When lifting the drop ball, make sure the back wall of the
bucket remains in a vertical position, see detail (B) in
illustration no. (7). The ball drop height is reached, when
the bucket is on a level with the cab roof.
● With the drop ball lifted, never tilt back the bucket
beyond the vertical position (B), otherwise the drop ball
could roll over and fall on the Shovel.
● Before leaving the Shovel locate the drop ball on a safe

place. DO NOT leave the drop ball in the bucket.
245
SAFETY DEVICES (SPECIAL EQUIPMENT)
Legend for illustration Z 20133_1
(1) Front splinter guard for operator’s cab
(2) Protection screen for lubrication system, swing gear

and working lights (if so equipped)
(3) Cylinder piston rod guard
(4) Swing ring guard
(5) Reinforcement ledges on bucket wall and clam

edges
NOTICE
More information regarding safety devices for drop ball oper-
ation on request.
246
(6) Pick-up position of the drop ball

A - Greatest circumference of the drop ball
(7) Drop height, level with cab roof

B - Back wall of the bucket in vertical position
WORKING HINTS
Place the rock to be crushed on a solid and level ground with the
impact surface in a horizontal position.
If so equipped lift up the cab front guard (1). The roof mounted
beacon will then automatically switched on for warning other per-
sons.
Change the impact surface of the rock by 90°, if after two to three
drops the rock is not being crushed.
247
3.14.5 COMBINED OPERATION CYCLES

With each of the control levers, two operation cycles can be initi-
ated simultaneously. In order to obtain efficient operation, always
select intermediate control lever positions in relation to work load.
NOTICE
The illustration shows a typical Shovel.
The movements shown in the illustration are controlled:
● at KMG control system with L.H. lever
● at EURO control system with R.H. lever
(N) Neutral position (5) Raising boom
(1) Lowering boom (6) Raising boom and filling bucket
(2) Lowering boom and emptying bucket (7) Filling bucket
(3) Emptying bucket (8) Lowering boom and filling bucket
(4) Raising boom and emptying bucket
248
NOTICE
The illustration shows a typical Shovel.
The movements shown in the illustration are controlled:
● at KMG control system with R.H. lever
● at EURO control system with L.H. lever
Legend for illustration Z 9711)
(N) Neutral position (5) Retracting stick
(1) Extending stick (away from machine) (6) Retracting stick and slewing to the left
(2) Extending stick and slewing to the right (7) Slewing to the left
(3) Slewing to the right (8) Extending stick and slewing to the left
(4) Retracting stick (towards machine) and slew-

ing to the right
249
3.15 WORKING INSTRUCTIONS OPERATION
3.15 WORKING INSTRUCTIONS
3.15.1 STABILITY OF THE SHOVEL
WARNING
Before beginning work prepare a suitable Shovel base, to
ensure adequate stability for safe working of the Shovel.
The stability of the Shovel is determined according to DIN 24087,

and is based on a level ground.
The Shovel must therefore be operated in such away, that its sta-
bility is always ensured and the danger of tipping over is avoided.
When slewing the superstructure take in account, that the stability

of the Shovel is being reduced when the superstructure (bucket)
is turning in a transverse direction to the undercarriage.
Avoid working with the crawler tracks across the slope, as this
reduces stability and increases the tendency for the Shovel to
slide or to tip over.
In the following a few Examples of Operating and Working Condi-

tions which can reduce the Stability of the Shovel:
● Overloading of the Shovel (Bucket overfilled).
● Ground conditions such as loose sand or wet soil (possibility

of a cave-in).
● Jerky acceleration or deceleration of working- and travel

motions.
● Operating on a slope.
3.15.2 SHOVEL OPERATION

● When working with the loader attachment, switch-off the fast
speed range (if equipped).
● Do not operate control levers jerkily.
● Do not work below overhanging rocks or earth masses.
● Always keep a safe distance to the edge of an excavation

where bank cave-ins are possible.
● Operation on a grade requires special care. Plan your work

so that the Shovel travels uphill and downhill parallel to the
grade. Bear in mind, that the Shovel’s stability is reduced
when operating on a slope.
● Always keep the Shovel under control.
● Know the Shovel’s limits - and do not exceed them.
250
OPERATION 3.15 WORKING INSTRUCTIONS
CAUTION
DO NOT Sweep with the loader attachment, illust. (Z 10369),
as this may result in severe damage on swing gear compo-
nents.
CAUTION
DO NOT use the bucket clam for loosening or removing
anchored rocks or other solid objects (illust. Z 19984 and
Z 19985), since such operations may result in severe damage
to the clam pivot bearings.
Precautions when operating hydraulic cylinders to end of

stroke
Do not operate the hydraulic cylinders of the working attachment

to the end of their strokes. This will bring excessive force onto the
inner stoppers of the cylinders and will reduce the lifetime of the
cylinders.
To prevent this, move the control levers to neutral position before

the cylinders reach their end of stroke.
251
3.15 WORKING INSTRUCTIONS OPERATION
● When working with the bucket in the longitudinal direction, the

final drives should be in the rear position illust. (Z 0144), for
the following reasons:
❍ The travel motors and travel gears are protected from fall-
ing rocks etc.
❍ When the Shovel is operated on muddy ground and the

tracks are covered with mud, the sprocket runs on a
clean track when backing up.
● When working with the loader in a cross direction to the track

group, be sure that the track is not raised off the ground, illust.
(Z 20978). This can cause the track to set-off from the rollers
when it is lowered down on the ground.
Also the flanges of the track rollers and the track shoes can
be bent by the excessive load.
● Loading Trucks:
Position the truck as closely as possible to the Shovel.
Do not swing the attachment over unprotected driver cabs.
Swing the attachment at a sufficient height over the loading
platform
Distribute material evenly on loading platform.
Do not overload the truck.
● Remove sticky material from the bucket.
● Always keep the Shovel as close as possible to the work

area. Short boom trips - high efficiency.
● When turning into a pit, the rotating motion must not be

stopped by the walls of the pit.
● Only a bucket with a complete set of teeth and cutting edges

in good condition ensures efficient performance.
● Loosen hard material and rocks with the bucket, not with the
stick crowding thrust.
● Correct bucket size and properly adjusted equipment pre-

vents overloading and ensures maximum operating efficiency
of the Shovel.
252
OPERATION 3.16 PARKING THE SHOVEL
3.16 PARKING THE SHOVEL

Park the machine at a safe place on level and solid ground.
● Lower the working attachment onto the ground in a position

as shown on the oil level plate at the hydraulic oil reservoir.
● Stop the motors and relieve the pressure in the hydraulic sys-
tem, see page 257 for more information.
● Move the safety lock lever fully to the rear in locked position.
WARNING
DO NOT leave the Operator’s Cab when the motors are run-
ning.
● Be sure to lock the operator’s cab door before leaving the

Shovel.
● If the Shovel has to be parked on steep terrain, the track

groups must be secured with wedges.
● Before leaving the Shovel make sure that the parked machine
does not impair local requirements, have consideration for
other mining traffic.
CLEANING THE TRACK GROUPS
Under working conditions with excessive material build up on the

crawler components, cleaning of the crawlers is very important to
prevent damage.
Material build up on guide wheels, drive sprockets and tracks can

lead to over tensioning of the tracks, resulting in severe damage
to these components.
If there is danger of frost, the tracks must also be cleaned.
NOTICE
Use a suitable cleaning device for removing dirt, mud and
debris from the tracks, rollers, guide wheels and sprockets.
253
3.17 STOPPING THE MAIN DRIVE MOTORS OPERATION
3.17 STOPPING THE MAIN DRIVE MOTORS
254
OPERATION 3.17 STOPPING THE MAIN DRIVE MOTORS
CAUTION
For EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN of BOTH MOOTORS, use
STRIKE BUTTON (8).
Additional emergency shut-down switches are located on the
machinery house. For more information → See "MACHINERY
HOUSE" on page 200.
Stopping procedure, see illustration Z25528.
1. Park the Shovel at a safe place on level and solid ground.
For more information → See "PARKING THE SHOVEL"

on page 253.
2. Deposit the working attachment onto the ground, proceed as

follows:
❍ A - Backhoe Attachment
Lower the backhoe attachment fully extended onto the
ground in a position as shown on the oil level plate.
❍ B - Bottom Dump Bucket Attachment

Lower the bottom dump bucket attachment onto the
ground in a position as shown on the oil level plate.
The positions A or B are necessary to prevent unintentional

movement of the working attachment when the pressure in
the hydraulic system is relieved and for correct checking of
the hydraulic oil level.
3. Move all controls into neutral position.
4. Turn switches (5 and 3) clockwise to stop position. After the

motors have come to standstill, relieve the pressure in the
hydraulic system.
255
3.17 STOPPING THE MAIN DRIVE MOTORS OPERATION
256
OPERATION 3.17 STOPPING THE MAIN DRIVE MOTORS
3.17.1 RELIEVE PRESSURE IN THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
WARNING
With the motors at standstill and main switch (6) in ON posi-
tion, move all controls for working attachment and crawlers
several times through all shift positions to relieve the pres-
sure in the hydraulic system. The necessary oil pressure for
shifting the spools of the main control valves is provided by
a pressure accumulator in the pilot oil circuit.
NOTICE
The pressure accumulator in the pilot oil circuit serves also
for lowering a raised working attachment to the ground with
the motors at standstill. If, for example, the motors stall with
the working attachment in a raised position, lowering of the
working attachment is possible by operating the respective
control lever.
5. Set main switch key (6) to ”0” position and remove.
6. Set safety lock lever (10) fully to the rear in LOCKED position.
7. Switch off the battery main switches and remove keys.
257
3.18 OPERATION OF THE LUBRICATION SYSTEM OPERATION
3.18 OPERATION OF THE LUBRICATION SYSTEM
3.18.1 CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM -CLS- FOR SUPERSTRUCTURE

AND ATTACHMENT
The central lubrication system works automatically as soon as the
motor is running.
The ECS System monitors the function of the central lubrication

system. Trouble conditions of the lubrication system are indicated
through fault messages on display (A).

tem
lubrication system
(3) Key operated service switch
(A) ECS display
Manual actuation of the central lubrication system
Manual actuation of the central lubrication system overrides the

adjusted pause time (factory setting 60 minutes). The lubrication
cycle starts after a pressure build up time of 1 to 2 minutes.
Thereafter the monitoring time of 10 minutes starts. The complete
lubrication cycle takes approximately 12 minutes. After this period
the lubrication cycle counter adds one lubrication cycle to the
memory. For display of the cycle counter reading use the menu
control of the ECS system, see page 123 for more information.
REMARK
The start of a manually actuated lubrication cycle can be
delayed by up to 10 minutes if the system is in the monitoring time
period of a previous automatic lubrication cycle.
CAUTION
If the central lubrication system fails to work for a period of
four hours automatic bucket motion cut off can happen
depending on the installed ECS soft ware. Repair the system
as soon as possible.
258
OPERATION 3.18 OPERATION OF THE LUBRICATION SYSTEM
ADJUSTMENTS OF THE CENTRAL LUBRICATION

SYSTEM
Manual actuation Mode of the Lubrication System

with Service Key
The manual actuation in the Service mode is useful for testing the
electrical and hydraulic functions of the of the lubrication system.
The pause time is reduced to 30 seconds and the holding time to
15 seconds permitting rapid sequences of lubrication cycles. Both
lubrication systems can be set to the manual actuation mode.
CAUTION
pause and holding times, grease will not reach to all lubrica-
tion points.
1. Insert key into service switch (3) and set to operating position.
2. Actuate the rotary switch (1) on the instrument panel. The

message # SERVICE appears on the display. Up to ten
repeated actuation of the switch are possible. The lubrication
cycles are counted and displayed in the cycle counter win-
dow.
3. After finishing the manual lubrication remove service key. The

system returns to the normal timer settings.
Adjustments of the Central Lubrication System
The following adjustments can be made with the menu control of

the ECS system:
Level 4: Service / Settings
- 4 - Settings
* PAUSE TIME : *
- 4 - Settings
Refer to section "ELECTRONIC MONITORING AND CONTROL

SYSTEM ECS" for description of adjustment procedure.
259
3.18 OPERATION OF THE LUBRICATION SYSTEM OPERATION
3.18.2 SWING CIRCLE PINION LUBRICATION SYSTEM ”SLS”

This system works automatically as soon as the motor is running.
The ECS System monitors the function of the swing circle lubrica-
tion system. Trouble conditions of the lubrication system are indi-
cated through fault messages on ECS display (A).

tem
lubrication system
(3) Key operated service switch
(A) ECS display
Manual actuation of the swing circle lubrication

system
Manual actuation of the lubrication system overrides the adjusted

pause time (factory setting 15 minutes). The lubrication cycle
starts after a pressure build up time of 1 to 2 minutes. Thereafter
the monitoring time of 10 minutes starts. The complete lubrication
cycle takes approximately 12 minutes. However, since the swing
circle lubrication system works only during slewing of the super-
structure also the monitoring time elapses only during the slewing
movement. This is the reason why the total monitoring time usu-
ally lasts longer than the adjusted 10 minutes. After elapsing of
the monitoring time the lubrication cycle counter adds one lubrica-
tion cycle to the memory. For display of the cycle counter reading
use the menu control of the ECS system, see page 123 for more
information.
REMARK
The start of a manually actuated lubrication cycle can be
delayed by up to 10 minutes if the system is in the monitoring time
period of a previous automatic lubrication cycle.
CAUTION
If the swing circle lubrication system fails to work for a
period of four hours automatic bucket motion cut off can
happen depending on the installed ECS soft ware. Repair the
system as soon as possible.
260
OPERATION 3.18 OPERATION OF THE LUBRICATION SYSTEM
SWING CIRCLE LUBRICATION SYSTEM ”SLS”
Manual actuation Mode of the Lubrication System with Ser-

vice Key
The manual actuation in the Service mode is useful for testing the
electrical and hydraulic functions of the lubrication system. The
pause time is reduced to 30 seconds and the holding time to 15
seconds permitting rapid sequences of lubrication cycles.
CAUTION
pause and holding times grease will not reach to all lubrica-
tion points.
REMARK
The swing ring lubrication system works only during slewing
of the superstructure.
1. Insert key into service switch (3) and set to operating position.
2. Actuate the rotary switch (2) of the swing ring gear lubrication
system. The message # SERVICE appears on the display. Up
to ten repeated actuation of the switch are possible. The lubri-
cation cycles are counted and displayed in the cycle counter
window.
3. After finishing the manual lubrication remove service key. The

system returns to the normal timer settings.
ADJUSTMENTS OF THE SWING CIRCLE LUBRICATION SYS-

TEM
The following adjustments can be made in the service menu of

the ECS system:
Level 4: Service Menu / Settings
- 4 - Settings
* PAUSE TIME : *
- 4 - Settings
Refer to section "ELECTRONIC MONITORING AND CONTROL

SYSTEM ECS" for description of adjustment procedure.
261
3.19 FIRE DETECTION, ACTUATION AND SUPPRESSION SYSTEM OPERATION
3.19 FIRE DETECTION, ACTUATION AND SUPPRESSION

SYSTEM
262
OPERATION 3.19 FIRE DETECTION, ACTUATION AND SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
3.19.1 CONTROL UNITS FOR THE FIRE DETECTION, ACTUATION AND

SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
The excavator is equipped with two different systems, illustration
Z25267.
I – CHECKFIRE SC-N electric detection and actuation system

which controls the Carbon Dioxide fire suppression system for the
following areas:
● Slip ring unit.

base.
The CHECKFIRE SC-N electric detection and actuation system

consists of control module (5), manual actuators (A and B), auto-
matic actuator (4), remote high level alarm (7), explosion-proof
pressure switch (8) and thermal spot detectors located in the pro-
tected areas.
The Carbon Dioxide fire suppression system consists of a steel
cylinder (10) filled with extinguishing gas Carbon Dioxide, piping
and discharge nozzles located in the protected areas.
Personnel Safety
WARNING
● The discharge of Carbon Dioxide into an enclosed space
can create dangerous oxygen deficiency. It can also
reduce visibility to a point where exits are difficult to
locate by persons attempting to evacuate the area.
● The use of Carbon Dioxide in an occupied space should

provide for the prompt evacuation of personnel and
resuscitation of anyone trapped in the hazard area. Time
delays, training, signs, alarms and breathing apparatus
should be provided to the personnel involved.
II – CHECKFIRE SC-N electric detection and warning system

which monitors the machinery house via a linear detection wire
(11) routed in the machinery house.
The CHECKFIRE SC-N electric detection and warning system
consists of control module (6) and the linear detection wire (11)
routed in the machinery house.
REMARK
The machinery house is not equipped with a fire suppression
system.
263
264
CAUTION
Before operating the Excavator make sure the Fire Detection,
Actuation and Suppression systems are operative.
Carry out inspection and maintenance according to the sepa-
rate Manual >CHECKFIRE SC-N ELECTRIC DETECTION AND
ACTUATION SYSTEM<. This manual is filed in volume 2
binder.
NOTICE
This section covers only such information necessary for the
operator to understand operation of the fire detection and
actuation system. All other information i.e. placing the sys-
tem in service, daily inspection, functional tests, mainte-
nance and trouble shooting are covered in the separate
manual.
(A) Strike button of the manual actuator, located next to the cab base door, for manual actuation of
the Carbon Dioxide fire suppression system -I-.
(B) Strike button of the manual actuator in the operator’s cab for manual actuation of the Carbon
Dioxide fire suppression system -I-.
(3) Expellant gas cartridges, must be replaced after actuation.
(4) Automatic actuator (gas motor) of the Carbon Dioxide fire suppression system -I-. If there is an
automatic actuation of the fire suppression system, pressurized gas will shutdown the main
drive motors via pressure switch (8) immediately and opens the extinguishing gas cylinder
(10) after the pre-adjusted discharge delay.
(5) Control module of the CHECKFIRE SC-N electric detection and actuation system. Refer to the
separate Manual >CHECKFIRE SC-N ELECTRIC DETECTION AND ACTUATION SYSTEM<
for all information concerning - Operational Modes, Daily Inspection, Maintenance and System
Conditions. This manual is filed in volume 2 binder.
(6) Control module of the CHECKFIRE SC-N electric detection and warning system -II-. Refer to
the separate Manual >CHECKFIRE SC-N ELECTRIC DETECTION AND ACTUATION SYS-
TEM< for all information concerning - Operational Modes, Daily Inspection, Maintenance and
System Conditions. This manual is filed in volume 2 binder.
(7) Remote high level alarm located outside on the Operator’s cab, this alarm will sound when the
system detects a fire.
(8) Explosion-proof pressure switch – DPST located in the cab base. This switch shuts off the
motors immediately when the fire detection system has a fire detected. The reset plunger (9)
moves out into its upper position. When the fire suppression system has been recharged,
push in the reset plunger.
(9) Reset plunger, be sure to push in this plunger as soon as the fire suppression system has
been recharged after actuation of the system.
(10) Steel cylinder filled with extinguishing gas Carbon Dioxide, located inside the cab base.
(11) Linear detection wire routed in the machinery house
265
266
3.19.2 REMOTE HIGH LEVEL ALARM *FIRE* LOCATED ON THE CAB

The alarm (7), illustration Z25267 will sound approximately 15
seconds before discharge of the fire suppression system in case
of automatic actuation of the system. Act according to the circum-
stances and the applying safety regulations. Evacuate area to
lessen risk of injury from flames.
Motor shut-down
When the fire detection system detects a fire, a shutdown function

for the motors will be actuated through pressure switch (8).
3.19.3 ACTUATION MODES OF THE FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM:

Manual actuation via strike button (A) of the manual actuator at
the cab base door or strike button (B) in operator’s cab.
WARNING
● Manual actuation will result in immediate system dis-
charge which may obscure vision. Make certain the Exca-
vator is stopped safely before manually actuating the
system. Manual actuation will bypass all auxiliary shut-
down and alarm functions.
● The discharge of Carbon Dioxide into an enclosed space

can create dangerous oxygen deficiency. It can also
reduce visibility to a point where exits are difficult to
locate by persons attempting to evacuate the area.
● The use of Carbon Dioxide in an occupied space should

provide for the prompt evacuation of personnel and
resuscitation of anyone trapped in the hazard area. Time
delays, training, signs, alarms and breathing apparatus
should be provided to the personnel involved.
For manual actuation via actuators (A or B), pull ring “1” and strike
button “2”.
Automatic actuation via fire detectors located in the protected

areas. The following areas are protected by the Fire Suppression
System:
● Slip ring unit.

base.
The machinery house is not equipped with a Fire Suppression

System. The machinery house is monitored by the Fire Detection
and Warning System II via a fire wire, which informs the operator
in case of a fire through control unit (6). Simultaneously the main
drive motors will be stopped.
267
268
Indication of Alarm Condition at Control Module

(5), illustration Z25267 in case of an AUTOMATIC
Actuation of the Fire Suppression System -I-:
Alarm to Shutdown Period - The RED alarm LED and the audio
alarm will pulse at a rate of 2 times per second.
Shutdown to Discharge Period - The RED alarm LED and the
audio alarm will pulse at a rate of 4 times per second.
Timer Setting (factory adjustment)
Alarm to Shutdown: 0 seconds
Shutdown to Discharge: 15 seconds
3.19.4 IN CASE OF FIRE
WARNING
● Act according to the circumstances and the applying
safety regulations.
● Evacuate area to lessen risk of injury from flames, heat,

extinguishing gas Carbon Dioxide, hazardous vapours,
explosions, or other hazards that may be created.
● Evacuate endangered Persons. Use breathing apparatus

to prevent suffocation caused through the extinguishing
gas Carbon Dioxide.
● Inform the fire brigade.
● Fight the fire.
REMARK
For continued protection, the Detection and Actuation System
and the Fire Suppression System must be recharged and tested
through authorized Service Personnel immediately after opera-
tion.
Indication of Alarm Condition at Control Module (6)

when the electric Detection and Warning System
-II- detects a Fire in the Machinery House:
The RED alarm LED and the audio alarm will pulse at a rate of 4
times per second.
Proceed according to the paragraph *In Case of Fire*.
269
3.20 TRANSFER PUMP FOR HYDRAULIC OIL OPERATION
3.20 TRANSFER PUMP FOR HYDRAULIC OIL

(SPECIAL EQUIPMENT)
270
OPERATION 3.20 TRANSFER PUMP FOR HYDRAULIC OIL
3.20.1 OPERATING THE TRANSFER PUMP

REMARK
The illustration shows the transfer pump arrangement viewed
from center of the platform.
(1) Cock for suction oil reservoir (12)
(2) Cock for return oil collector pipe (13)
(3) Cock for back-pressure valve pipe (15)

● C - Closed
● O - Open
(4) Electric motor of the transfer pump
(5) Transfer pump
(6) Operating switch (S35) for transfer pump (4)

(7) Level switch (B169) turns off the transfer pump (4)
when the oil level in the main oil reservoir has
reached maximum permissible height. The pump will
be switched on again when the oil level sinks below
the maximum height.
(8) Suction line to suction oil reservoir (12)
(9) Suction line to return oil collector pipe (13)
(10) Suction line to back-pressure valve pipe (15)
(11) Hand wheel of main shut-off valve between suction oil

reservoir and main oil reservoir
● To OPEN the valve turn hand wheel (11) CCW to
the stop.
● To CLOSE the valve turn hand wheel (11) CW to
the stop.
A proximity switch located on the gearbox of the shut-
off valve monitors the valve position. With the valve
not fully open a corresponding message will be dis-
played on the ECS screen in the Operator’s cab.
CAUTION
Before starting the motors make sure the shut-off
valve is completely open by turning hand wheel
(11) fully to the left (CCW).

(13) Return oil collector pipe in front of main control valves
(14) Main control valves
(15) Back-pressure valve pipe

(16) Back-pressure valve
271
272
3.20.2 FUNCTIONS OF THE TRANSFER PUMP

A - Transfusing oil from the suction oil reservoir (12), illustra-
tion Z25265 into the main oil reservoir. Necessary for evacua-
tion of the suction oil reservoir, when changing the hydraulic
oil (main oil reservoir will be evacuated via refilling panel con-
nector, see page 276 for details). Prior servicing the main
hydraulic pumps it is advisable to empty the suction oil reser-
voir partially.
B - Transfusing oil from return oil collector pipe (13) and back-
pressure valve pipe (15) into main oil reservoir. Necessary
when changing the hydraulic oil and prior to servicing the high
pressure filters or the main control valves (oil return system).
CAUTION
Before operating the transfer pump, lower the attachment to
the ground with the stick fully retracted and the bucket fully
rolled back. Shut down the motors.
NOTICE
During normal operation the valves (1, 2 and 3) must be in
closed position ”C”.
A - Pumping the oil from the Suction Oil Reservoir (12) into
the Main Oil Reservoir
1. Close main valve (11).
2. Aerate the return oil filter chamber by opening the filler plug
on top of the main reservoir.
3. Open cock (1), position ”O”.
REMARK
In order to prevent build-up of a vacuum in the suction sys-
tem, open the vent plugs on the suction port of each main hydrau-
lic pump.
4. Switch on pump (4) with switch (6).

The level switch (7) turns off transfer pump (4) when the oil
level in the main reservoir has reached maximum height. The
pump will be switched on again when the oil level sinks below
the maximum level. When changing the hydraulic oil, be sure
to evacuate the main oil reservoir via the refilling panel con-
nector simultaneously with the transfusion procedure. Other-
wise the level switch (7) would switch off the transfer pump
preventing overfilling of the main oil reservoir.
5. When the suction oil reservoir is empty or after completion of

the maintenance job switch off transfer pump (4) with switch
(6). Close cock (1), position ”C” and open main valve (11).
6. With the main shut-off valve (11) open, the suction oil reser-
voir will be filled with oil from the main oil reservoir. Let the
vent plugs on the main pump suction ports open to allow the
air to escape from the suction oil reservoir and hoses.
273
274
A - Pumping the oil from the Suction Oil Reservoir (12) into
the Main Oil Reservoir (continued)
7. The suction oil reservoir and the suction hoses are filled,
when bubble free oil flows out at the vent plug openings on
each main pump. Install vent plugs and tighten securely.
8. Check oil level in all main pump housings and vent the
hydraulic pumps according to page 417 in the Maintenance
Section 4.
9. Check oil level in the main reservoir. Fill up with new hydraulic
oil as necessary and install filler plug.
10. Start the motors and run without load to allow trapped air to
be removed from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION
DO NOT start the motors when the suction oil reservoir is
empty.
B - Pumping the Oil from the Return Oil Collector Pipe (13)
and back-pressure valve pipe (15) into the Main Reservoir
1. To empty the collector pipe (13), open cock (2).
2. Aerate the return oil filter chamber by opening the filler plug
on top of the main reservoir.
3. Switch on pump with switch (6).
4. Observe oil level sight gauge at the main oil reservoir. As

soon as the oil level remains constant the return oil collector
pipe is empty. Now switch off the transfer pump (4) and close
cock (2).
5. To empty the back-pressure valve pipe (15), open cock (3).
6. Switch on pump with switch (6).
7. Observe oil level sight gauge at the main oil reservoir. As

soon as the oil level remains constant the back-pressure
valve pipe is empty. Now switch off the transfer pump (4) and
close cock (3).
8. Install filler plug on top of main reservoir.
CAUTION
DO NOT start the motors during servicing.
275
3.21 CENTRAL REFILLING SYSTEM OPERATION
3.21 CENTRAL REFILLING SYSTEM

(Special Equipment)
276
OPERATION 3.21 CENTRAL REFILLING SYSTEM
3.21.1 SYSTEMS CONNECTED TO THE REFILLING SYSTEM

The following systems are connected to the receiver panel (A),
illust. (Z 22662):
● Main Hydraulic Oil Reservoir
● Central Lubrication System (CLS)
● Swing circle pinion Lubrication System (SLS)
● Water Tank for Hand Wash Sink in the Operator’s Cab
(A) Receiver panel with Wiggins connectors
(B) Grease container with pump units of the automatic lubrication systems
(C) Monitor and control box
(1) Adapter for evacuation and filling of the main hydraulic oil reservoir. After
the oil is completely evacuated, drain the oil from suction oil reservoir, col-
lector pipe and back-pressure valve pipe. Refer to maintenance section,
item hydraulic oil change for draining procedure. Open the shut-off valve
between main oil reservoir and suction oil reservoir.
Fill the hydraulic reservoir and observe indicator lamp (7).
(2) Adapter for filling the grease container of the Central Lubrication System
(CLS). Before filling the grease container make sure the grease filter in the
filling line is not obstructed. Observe lamp (9).
(3) Adapter for filling the grease container of the Swing circle pinion Lubrica-
tion System (SLS). Before filling the grease container make sure the
grease filter in the filling line is not obstructed. Observe lamp (8).
(4) Adapter for filling the water tank in the Operator’s cab. The water tank has
a capacity of 50 liters. The filling line of the water tank is equipped with a
drain cock (5). Before filling the water tank, drain the old water by opening
this drain cock. Close the drain cock and fill in 50 liters of clear water. The
tank can also be filled through a filler opening in the Operator’s cab.
(5) Drain cock for water tank in the operator’s cabl
(6) Push button for testing lamps (7, 8 and 9). Push the button, all lamps must
light up. If a lamp does not light up, corrective action must be taken.
(7) Indicator lamp, main hydraulic oil reservoir FULL. Recheck hydraulic oil
level at the sight gauge before operating the machine.
(8) Indicator lamp, grease container of Swing circle pinion Lubrication System
FULL
(9) Indicator lamp, grease container of Central lubrication System FULL
277
278
Refilling Procedure:
Water tank in the Operator’s cab
NOTICE
If freezing temperatures are expected, drain the water from
the water tank filling line by opening the drain cock(5), illust.
(Z 22662). If so equipped, switch on the motor-independent
auxiliary cab heater during standstill periods to prevent
freezing of the water in the cab water tank.
WARNING
● DO NOT drink the water from the water-tap in the
Operator’s cab.
● Use for hand washing only.
REMARK
The overflow line of the hand wash sink and water tank must
not be obstructed. The overflow line is routed inside the cab base
through a hole in the base floor to the outside. Excess water will
flow through this line to the outside just below the cab base.
Refer to Maintenance section 4, for the correct lubricant

specifications and filling capacities.
For motor Lubricants refer to the separate motor
Operation & Maintenance Manual filed in Volume 2 Binder.
● Connect supply lines to the respective adapters.
● Monitor the respective fluid/lubricant level at the indicator

lights (7, 8 and 9).
● After finishing the refilling operation, cover the adapters with

the protection caps provided.
CAUTION
Recheck fluid levels before operating the machine.
279
280
3.21.2 REFILLABLE GREASE CONTAINERS OF THE AUTOMATIC

LUBRICATION SYSTEMS
(1) Grease filter for swing circle pinion lubrication system. Before filling the grease container
make sure the filter is not obstructed. Service the filter element according to the instructions in
the maintenance section 4, item no. 4.8.
(2) Grease container of the swing circle pinion lubrication system
(3) Hydraulically driven grease pump
(4) Grease pressure gauge
(5) In-line grease filter
(6) Quick disconnect coupling
(7) Grease filter for central lubrication system. Before filling the grease container make sure the
filter is not obstructed. Service the filter element according to the instructions in the mainte-
nance section 4, item no. 4.8.
(8) Grease container of the central lubrication system
(9) Hydraulically driven grease pump
(10) Grease pressure gauge

(11) In-line grease filter
(12) Quick disconnect coupling
(13) Breather filters

(14) Grease level gauge for manual checking of the grease level
Refill the respective grease container, when the Fault message

”Central lube system grease container on reserve” or
”Swing circle lube system grease container on reserve”
is being displayed on the ECS monitor.
CAUTION
The central lubrication system and the swing circle pinion
lubrication system have to be filled with different types of
grease. Select the correct greases according to the Lubricant
Charts in volume 2 binder.
As soon as a grease container is filled up to the correct level the

corresponding indicator lamp (8 or 9), illust. (Z 22662) lights up
and the signal horn sounds.. In order to ensure proper operation
of the lubrication systems carry out the periodic maintenance of
the grease filters (1 and 7), illust. (Z22879). Refer to maintenance
section 4, item no. 4.8. Periodic inspection of the grease pumps
(3 and 9) at least once a year is advisable. After finishing the refill-
ing operation, cover the adapters with the protection caps pro-
vided. Carry out a test-run of the lubrication systems by actuating
the switches on the instrument panel.
281
3.22 SERVICE CRANE (SPECIAL EQUIPMENT) OPERATION
3.22 SERVICE CRANE (SPECIAL EQUIPMENT)
282
OPERATION 3.22 SERVICE CRANE (SPECIAL EQUIPMENT)
3.22.1 OPERATING THE CRANE
WARNING
● Before operating the crane, check condition and fasten-
ing of the crane structure and base.
● Read the separate Instruction Manual ”CRANE TYPE

HMK 60 Ta1” before operating the Crane. The Crane
Instruction Manual is filed in volume 2 Binder.
NOTICE
● DO NOT exceed maximum payload of 1000 kg.
● DO NOT lift the hook block to the stop.
● Carry out inspection and maintenance according to the

separate Crane Instruction Manuals.
Check security and tightening torque of all mounting
bolts after the first 100 operating hours and thereafter
every 1000 operating hours. Refer to the maintenance
section for the tightening torque specifications.
Legend for illustration Z22979:
1 Control panel.
2 Electric – hydraulic power unit
3 Rotating boom
4 Lift boom
5 Hydraulic rope winch

6 Lift boom extensions
7 Load hook
8 Support for lift boom (4) in home position
9 Securing eye for load hook (7) in home position
10 Emergency stop switch for all hydraulic operations of the crane
11 Warning light, if this light comes on the crane has reached 90% of its maximum permissible
lifting capacity. This light is used as a pre-warning to indicate a possible overload condition.
12 Indicator light automatic cut-off of the hydraulic winch. Use button (12A) to reactivate winch.
12A Push button. This button is used to override an automatic cut-off of the hydraulic winch. If a
minimum of three windings of rope are left on the winch drum, the winch rope cut-off device
automatically stops the winch. To reactivate the winch push in the button while simultaneously
rewinding the winch rope.
13 Control lever for lift boom extensions EXTEND - RETRACT
14 Control lever for lift boom RAISE - LOWER
15 Control lever for rotating boom SLEW LEFT - SLEW RIGHT
16 Control lever for winch rope UP - DOWN
283
3.22 SERVICE CRANE (SPECIAL EQUIPMENT) OPERATION
284
OPERATION 3.22 SERVICE CRANE (SPECIAL EQUIPMENT)
Operating the Service Crane (continued)
WARNING
● Make sure everyone is in the clear before lifting or lower-
ing a load with the crane. Never swing or position a load
over personnel.
DO NOT exceed the maximum permissible lifting load of
1000 kg.
● Be sure to secure the crane in rest position by lowering

the lift boom (4), illustration (Z 22979) onto support (8)
and fastening load hook (7) to eye (9).
For more information of correct crane operation and maintenance

refer to the separate Instruction Manual ”CRANE TYPE HMK 60
Ta1”. The Crane Instruction Manual is filed in volume 2 Binder.
285
3.23 WORK ON THE LOADER ATTACHMENT OPERATION
3.23 WORK ON THE LOADER ATTACHMENT
WARNING
● Work on the loader attachment must be carried out only
by personnel with special knowledge of the Shovel.
Improper working on the attachment can cause severe
accidents with personal injury.
● If you are not sure how to carry out the work on the
attachment contact your local Komatsu Service Station
for support.
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS
● Wear safety clothing, goggles, respirator and other safety

devices, whenever working conditions make this necessary.
● Provide hoists of sufficient capacity to lift heavy units. Refer to

the separate ”Assembly Procedure Manual” filed in volume 2
binder for more information.
● Before working on the loader attachment lower it to the

ground, stop the motor and cycle all hydraulic control levers
to relieve all pressure before disconnecting hydraulic lines.

DRIVE MOTORS" on page 254
● Lifting gear, tools and other suspension systems must be in

good condition and of sufficient lifting capacity.
● Be sure hydraulic cylinders and attachment components are

properly supported from hoist and securely fastened before
removing supporting pins.
● Floors must be clean and dry. After draining operations be

sure all spillage is cleaned up.
286
OPERATION 3.24 TRANSPORTATION AND LIFTING OF THE SHOVEL

SHOVEL
WARNING
Before Disassembling, Lifting or Transporting this Shovel
contact your local Komatsu Service Station for all the neces-
sary instructions for safe and economic disassembling, lift-
ing and transportation procedures of your Shovel.
3.24.1 DISASSEMBLING OF THE SHOVEL

The Shovel is being transported disassembled into its main com-
ponents.
WARNING
Disassembling of the Shovel must be carried out only by per-
sonnel with special knowledge of the Shovel. Improper dis-
assembling procedures can cause severe accidents with
personal injury.
The sequence of disassembly can be derived from the Assembly

Procedure Manual in volume 2 Binder. Disassembling is basically
the reverse order of the assembling procedure.
3.24.2 TRANSPORTATION AND LIFTING

The transport dimensions and weights of the Shovel’s compo-
nents are listed in the separate Assemby Procedure Manual filed
in volume 2 binder.
Observe the operating permits of the low loader used for trans-
portation. They contain the permissible load, loading width and
height.
WARNING
● Observe the federal, state and local laws and regulations
for transportation of heavy units. Know the safety rules
and laws before you transport this Shovel.
● Make sure the low loader and the components of the

Shovel are equipped with the correct safety devices.
● Secure the Shovel and all components transported on

the low loader against movement.
287
3.25 RETRIEVAL PROCEDURE OPERATION
3.25 RETRIEVAL PROCEDURE
WARNING
● Before starting retrieval measures, inform the responsi-
ble safety department.
● Check whether fuel or oil has flown out.
● Observe the local fire prevention- and safety regulations.
CAUTION
Contact your local Komatsu service station for all the neces-
sary instructions for safe and economic retrieval procedures
of your Shovel
NOTICE
Select the sequence of retrieval steps with regard to the sta-
bility of the Shovel. It must be prevented that the removal of
main components impairs the stability of the Shovel
GENERAL
The ”Assembly Procedure Manual” in volume 2 binder contains

information for lifting the main components of the Shovel.
Provide adequate crane and lifting gear with sufficient lifting

capacity.
288
OPERATION 3.26 SHOVEL STORAGE
3.26 SHOVEL STORAGE
GENERAL
Storage periods up to 30 days require no special preservation

when the unit is stored in a protected place. When the Shovel is
placed in storage for 30 days or more follow the procedure below.
NOTICE
The description below includes special equipment which
may not be installed in your machine.
3.26.1 PREPARING FOR STORAGE

1. Clean the Shovel thoroughly, lubricate all points according to
the lubrication chart. Move the machine to a protected place
or cover the Shovel with a tarpaulin. Retract all hydraulic cyl-
inders as far as possible. Cover the protruding piston rods
with grease.
2. Refer to Motor Operation and Maintenance Manual for motor

storage procedure.
3. Seal the electrical components and breather on the hydraulic

oil reservoir to prevent dirt and moisture from entering.
4. Remove the batteries and store them in a cool, dry place (0 to

10° C) to minimize self discharge. Be sure the batteries are
fully charged. Never allow batteries to run down below ¾ full
charge.
5. Loosen all drive belts.
6. Repaint areas that have paint damage with a good quality

paint. Grease all machined unpainted surfaces with good
quality grease to prevent rust.
7. Drain condensation from hydraulic oil reservoir. If necessary,

add hydraulic oil.
8. Attach a tag to the instrument panel to indicate what work has

been done.
3.26.2 ONE MONTH REPETITIVE SERVICE PERIOD

1. Service the motor according to the motor manual.
2. Check all oil levels according to the lubrication chart.
3. Drain condensation from hydraulic oil reservoir.
4. Operate air conditioning for approx. ½ hour.
289
3.26 SHOVEL STORAGE OPERATION
3.26.3 SIX MONTH REPETITIVE SERVICE PERIOD

1. Perform steps 1 through 4 of the one month repetitive service
period.
2. Lubricate the Shovel according to lubrication chart (manual

lubrication only).
3. Check hydraulic system and all gear boxes for leakage. If

necessary - fill up the units with the specified lubricant.
Repaint surfaces that have paint damage.
4. Prepare the motor for operation according to the motor man-

ual. Tighten all drive belts. Install fully charged batteries.
Make sure the correct voltage is applied.
5. Remove coverings from electrical components and breathers

on the hydraulic reservoir.
6. Start the motors.
7. Operate heater unit and air conditioning.
8. Operate the central lubricating system and swing ring gear

lubrication system. Check the lubrication results at the
respective lubrication points.
9. Carry out several complete working cycles with the loader

attachment.
10. Stop the motors. Install all coverings which have been
removed according to step 5. Service the motor according to
the motor manual. Lubricate all machined surfaces. Remove
Batteries and store as described under "Preparing for Stor-
age". Loosen all drive belts.
3.26.4 PREPARING FOR OPERATION

1. Remove grease from all machined unpainted surfaces (piston
rods).
2. Install fully charged batteries.
3. Remove all coverings.
4. Service the motor according to the motor manual. Tighten all

drive belts.
5. Carry out the maintenance according to the maintenance sec-

tion 4 in this manual.
6. Start the motors. DO NOT place the Shovel under load before
the normal operating values are indicated.
7. Carry out several complete working cycles. Check the func-

tion of special equipments (central lubricating system, swing
circle pinion lubricating system, fire detection and suppres-
sion system etc.).
290
OPERATION 3.27 TROUBLE SHOOTING
3.27 TROUBLE SHOOTING
GENERAL
The following charts list a number of the most common problems

encountered in operation. Some of the faults may be due to care-
less handling or operation, improper maintenance or the use of
lubricating oils other than specified. The "Probable Cause" col-
umn is formulated in such a way as to imply the answer to partic-
ular failure. For repairs requiring expert knowledge and tools,
consult authorized service personnel.
3.27.1 MAIN DRIVE ELECTRIC MOTOR
NOTICE
Refer to the trouble shooting chart in the separate motor
maintenance manual. This manual is part of volume 2 binder.
291
3.27 TROUBLE SHOOTING OPERATION
3.27.2 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Problem Probable cause
● Hydraulic oil not at operating temperature.

● Motor speed too low.
● Reservoir low on oil
● Restrictions in lines
● Cooling circuit, pump control system and/or pilot control circuit
Poor hydraulic system perfor- defective.
mance ● Internal leakage (control blocks, valves or power units.)
● Pressure lines twisted or kinked
● Spool not in full stroke.
● Relief valve defective, or out of adjustment.
● Worn cylinders.
● Defective hydraulic pump.
● Low oil level

● Incorrect viscosity or type of oil
● Hydraulic oil cooler clogged with dirt.
● Oil cooler fan defective or wrong speed.
● Cooling circuit defective
Excessive oil temperature
● Pump control system defective
● Spool not in full stroke.
● Internal leakage (control blocks, valves or power units)
● Worn pump components
● Job conditions (high temperature of materials being handeld)
● Piston rod bent
● Piston sticking
● Inside diameter of cylinder tube partially increased or scored
● Air in control circuit
Jerky motion of power cylinders
● Oil too cold
● Valve spool sticking, centering springs defective
● Pump and/or motor control system defective
● Valve of power circuit defective
● Inssufficient lubrication of swing ring gear and/or slewing connection.

● Slewing connection mounting bolts loose
● Drive pinion worn
Noise when slewing ● Swing gear bearings worn
● Sun gear or planetary pinions worn
● High pressure circuit valves defective
● Anti-caviation valves sticking
● Air in hydraulic system

● Poor quality oil
● Excessive by-passing of oil over relief valves
Excessive oil foaming ● Pressure hoses badly twisted or kinked
● Restricted oil flow due to foreign matter
● Breather on the reservoir clogged.
● Relief valve improperly adjusted
292
OPERATION 3.27 TROUBLE SHOOTING
3.27.3 FINAL DRIVES AND SWING GEAR

● Incorrect lubricant or oil level too low
● Bearings scored or damaged.
Noisy operation
● Sun gear teeth excessively worn or damaged
● Bearings of planetary pinions worn
3.27.4 CRAWLER TRACKS

● Wrong track tension
● Track roller loose or out of alignment
Excessive track wear ● Track shoes loose
● Track links stuck
● Worn drive sprocket
● Wrong track tension

Excessive wear on drive sprocket ● Track links (pins/bores) Excessively worn
● Sprocket, rollers and guide wheel out of aligment
293
3.27 TROUBLE SHOOTING OPERATION
294
4. MAINTENANCE
295
4.1 FOREWORD MAINTENANCE
4.1 FOREWORD
This section contains instructions for the correct care and mainte-
nance of your machine.
NOTICE
Since this section covers also special equipment and acces-
sories, you may find illustrations and descriptions which do
not apply to your machine.
DEFINITIONS
Service point
Unit or system where the prescribed maintenance work has to be

performed (e.g. motor, hydraulic, PTO etc.).
Service intervals
Number of operating hours after which the maintenance work has

to be performed (e.g. “Every 10 Operating Hours”, at 10, 20, 30
etc.; “Every 250 Operating Hours”, at 250, 500, 750 etc.).
GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS
Thoroughly clean all grease fittings, caps and plugs before lubri-
cating.
Seals must be replaced when oil drain plugs and oil level plugs
have been opened.
Fill-up fuel tank at the end of the shift to prevent condensation of

moisture.
It is recommended to carry-out oil change in assemblies when

they are still at operating temperature to speed up draining.
WARNING
Avoid direct contact of hot oil with your skin. Hot oil can
cause personal injury.
296
MAINTENANCE 4.2 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE
4.2 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE

● Before starting any lubrication or maintenance work read the
Fundamental Safety Instructions on page 16.
● Park the Excavator at a safe place on level ground. Proceed

according to the instructions on page 253
”Parking the Excavator”. Lower the attachment flat onto the
ground. Move all control levers to neutral position.
● Stop the motors and move all control levers through their shift
positions to relieve the pressure in the hydraulic system.
Refer to page 254 ”Stopping the Motors” for detailed descrip-
tion of the stopping procedure.
● Before any maintenance work is started, set the maintenance

safety switch to 0 position. Refer to page 203 for location of
the maintenance safety switch. In the 0 position the motors
can not be started. Secure this position by inserting a padlock
into the holes of the switch. Up to three padlocks can be
attached to the holes provided.
● A warning plate ”CAUTION MACHINE MAINTENANCE”

must be fixed in the Operator’s cab before any lubrication or
maintenance work is started.
NOTICE
Some checks and adjustments can only be done with the
motor running. For such jobs two men are necessary.
Thereby, the controls must not be left unattended, while the
other man carries out checks and adjustments.
The man in the operator’s seat must keep constant visual
contact with the other one and they must agree on suitable
communication signals before they start their work.
● Block the machine to prevent machine movement
● Always use safety devices to block hydraulic cylinders. Never

rely on the machine hydraulic system to hold when working
on the loader attachment. A hydraulic line or cylinder could
fail or someone could accidently strike the control levers
causing the loader to fall.
● Relieve all pressure in the hydraulic system before servicing

the hydraulic system.
● Oily cloth and inflammable material must be removed from

the machine. Clean the excavator before starting mainte-
nance work.
● Switch-off battery main switch and remove key, before work-

ing on the electrical system.
● Wear safety clothing, goggles, respirator and other safety

devices, whenever working conditions make this necessary.
Observe the local safety rules.
● Never allow unauthorized persons access to the machine

during lubrication and maintenance work.
297
4.2 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE
● After servicing, remove oily cloth, inflammable material and

all tools from the machine.
● Clean the Excavator with a steam jet, especially after servic-

ing the hydraulic system.
NOTICE
● For cleaning the Excavator and its components use only
fresh water with a salt content of less than 0.05%.
● For cleaning the headlights, DO NOT use steam jet, high

pressure cleaning device or strong water jet.
● Be sure to reinstall safety devices, guards or shields

after adjusting and/or servicing the machine.
298
MAINTENANCE 4.3 FUEL AND LUBRICANTS
4.3 FUEL AND LUBRICANTS
Ambient
Point of Viscosity Quality Grades
Lubricant Temperature
Lubrication Grades DIN/API
°C
Refer to MOTOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL for Lubricant

Main Drive Motors
Specifications.
- 20 to + 11 22 -
Hydraulic oil
“HLP or -14 to + 21 32
“HLPD” or
Hydraulic System - 6 to + 31 46 DIN 51524 T.2 and T.3-HLP
with ZINC 32 - 68
anti-wear 0 to + 40 68
additives *1)
+ 5 to + 48 100 -
Hydraulic oil DIN 51524.

Travel gears, Final - 40 to + 10 HLP T32
"HLP” T.2 and T.3- HLP
drives and Swing
gears Gear oil ”CLP” DIN 51517
-15 to + 50 CLP 220
*2) 3 - CLP
Brake housings and Engine oil SAE 10

motor adapter hous-
all HLP 22 or
ings of Travel gears or Hydraulic oil DIN 51524T.2 and T.3- HLP
and swing Gears *3) HLP 32
PTO’s (Pump Hydraulic oil DIN 51524.

- 40 to + 10 HLP T32
distributor gears) and ”HLP” T.2 and T.3- HLP
pump drive shaft Gear oil ”CLP” DIN 51517
housings -15 to + 50 CLP 150
*2) 3 - CLP
Fan bearing hous- DIN 51517

ings of Hydraulic oil Gear oil ”CLP” all CLP 150 3 - CLP
coolers
NOTICE
● *1) DO NOT mix ZINC-FREE Hydraulic oils with Hydraulic
oils containing Zinc.
DO NOT mix Mineral Hydraulic oils with Synthetic
Hydraulic oils.
Mixing of the above oils, will reduce anti wear properties
and oxidation stability of the oil. Quick plugging of the oil
filters in the hydraulic system will occur.
● *2) Refer to the chart ”Gear Oils” in volume 2 binder for

the released gear oil qualities and viscosity grades.
● *3) Brake housings of swing gears manufactured by L&S

have no seperate oil compartment as barake discs are
lubricated by splash oil from the gear box.
REMARK
The lubricating instructions in this book refer to the
recommended grade specifications. Damages caused
by using lubricants other than specified are not covered
by the manufacturer’s warranty.
299
4.3 FUEL AND LUBRICANTS MAINTENANCE
Ambient Quality Grades

Point of Viscosity
Lubricant Temperature
Lubrication Grades
°C DIN/API
Grease Fittings
(manual lubrication) Refer to the Lubricant Chart in volume 2 binder for the recommended
Multi-Purpose
Multi-Purpose Greases. The part numbers of recommended Multi-
Central Grease ”MPG”
Purpose Greases are listed in the Parts Catalog.
Lubrication System
Swing Circle Teeth Refer to PARTS & SERVICE NEWS, Bulletin No. AH00519 in volume
(manual lubrication) 2 binder for the recommended Adhesive Lubricants.
Adhesive
The part numbers of the recommended Adhesive Lubricants are
Swing Circle Pinion Lubricant
listed in the Parts Catalog.
Lubrication System
Track rollers, DIN 51517

Gear oil all CLP 220
Carrier rollers and 3 CLP
”CLP"
Idler wheels
Air conditioning R 134a
Refrigerant
system
REMARK
The Air Conditioning is prepared for
Refrigerant Special oil Refrigerant ”R134a” only.
compressor See Note below. Observe Notice below.
NOTICE
The Air Conditioning must be filled with refrigerant ”R134a”
through authorized Service Specialists only. DO NOT use
refrigerant ”R12”, otherwise serious damage on system com-
ponents could occur. The lubrication oil for the refrigerant
compressor must be compatible with ”R134a” refrigerant.
300
MAINTENANCE 4.3 FUEL AND LUBRICANTS
301
4.3 FUEL AND LUBRICANTS MAINTENANCE
302
MAINTENANCE 4.4 FILLING CAPACITIES
4.4 FILLING CAPACITIES
Liter Liter
Unit or System Unit or System
(approx.) (approx.)
Hydraulic Oil Reservoir 3600.0 *1) Travel Gears, each: 155.0

Total Hydraulic System 6600.0 Motor Adapter Housings, each 2.0
REMARK
Pump Distributor Gears, The travel gear brakes are dry
95.0
each: type multiple disk brakes. DO NOT fill
the housings with oil.
Oil Collector Reservoir, Auxil-

1.0 Final drive housings, each 165.0
iary Hydraulic Pumps:
Main Hydraulic Pumps, Drive

1.5 Guide Wheels, each 3.2
Shaft Housing
Swing Gears made by L&S,

42.0 Support Rollers, each 7.0
each:
Motor Adapter Housings 0.6 Track Rollers, each 2,7
Swing Gears made by Sie- Water tank for hand wash sink in Oper-
50.0
benhaar, each: 60.0 ator’s cab
Motor Adapter Housings *2) Water reservoir for windshield washer 7.0
Brake Housings *2)
*1) Oil change quantity including suction oil tank and return oil col-
lector pipes approximately 4450 liter with loader attachment in oil
level checking position, see oil level plate on the main hydraulic
oil reservoir.
*2) Fill up to level gauge marking.
REMARK
Capacities listed above are approximate values.
For proper checking use level plugs, dipsticks, and inspection
openings provided for this purpose. Prior to commissioning check
the fluid levels in all units and systems listed above.
303
4.5 STANDARD TORQUE LIST MAINTENANCE
4.5 STANDARD TORQUE LIST
Tightening torque
Nm
Bolt Wrench
lbs.ft.
dia. size [mm]
Quality grades
8.8 10.9 12.9
M 10 17 43 63 73
32 47 54
M 12 19 74 108 127
54.6 80 94
M 14 22 118 173 202
87 128 149
M 16 24 179 265 310
132 196 229
M 18 27 255 360 425
188 265 313
M20 30 360 510 600

265 376 443
M 22 32 485 690 810
358 509 597

M 24 36 620 880 1030
457 649 760
M 27 41 920 1310 1530

679 966 1128
M 30 46 1250 1770 2080
922 1305 1534

M 33 50 1690 2400 2800
1246 1770 2065
M 36 55 2170 3100 3600
1600 2286 2655
M 39 60 2800 4000 4700
2065 2950 3466

Insert all bolts lubricated with MPG, KP2K
304
MAINTENANCE 4.6 LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
4.6 LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
4.6.1 INITIAL SERVICING
AFTER THE FIRST 250 OPERATING HOURS
Change oil in Swing gears, Travel gears and PTO’s (pump distrib-
utor gears). Thereafter every 3000 hours, but at least once a year.
An oil sample analysis should be made every 1000 operating
hours.
Hydraulic system: Replace return oil filter elements and leakage

oil filter element. Inspect return oil strainers. Thereafter every
1000 hours.
AFTER THE FIRST 250 AND 1000 OPERATING

HOURS
Check tightening torque of high strength bolt connections. There-

after every 1000 hours.
NOTICE
● The mounting bolts of the left and right crawler carrier to
the undercarriage carbody have to be retightened only
after the first 1000 operating hours, see page 411 for
retightening procedure.
● The swing circle connection bolts need only to be

checked after the first 1000 operating hours in accor-
dance with PARTS&SERVICE NEWS No. AH00511 filed in
volume 2 binder.
NOTICE
The above initial service is of vital importance for proper
operation and long service life of the machine.
4.6.2 PERIODIC SERVICING INTERVALS

All following intervals of time between services are based on
average operating conditions. Under unusually severe conditions
of operation, reduce the interval of time between services.
NOTICE
The periodic servicing intervals are also displayed on the
ECS screen.
Carry out the maintenance work of indicated service inter-
vals according to this maintenance section.
305
4.6 LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE MAINTENANCE
4.6.3 PERIODIC SERVICING SCHEDULE
Service Intervals Service Point Service See
Immediately apply grease if bare

Swing circle toothing page 313
spots are visible
Fill grease containers

When necessary Automatic lubrication systems page 315
Clean or replace filter elements
Track rollers If leakage occurs replace
Carrier rollers floating seals and fill with GL page 319
Guide wheels ISO VG CLP 220

Shovel Walk-around inspection page 321
Check grease injectors of auto-

Working attachment matic lubrication system. Check for page 325
proper lubrication.
Check grease injectors of auto-

Every 10 operating Swing circle matic lubrication system. Check for page 329
hours or daily proper lubrication.
Track groups Clean, esp. in winter page 331
Main drive motors Checks (1)
Fire detection and actuation

Inspection (2)
system (if so equipped)
Service crane Inspection (4)
Swing gears and Motor adapter

Check oil levels page 333
housings
Every 50 operating Travel gears, Motor adapter

Check oil levels page 337
hours or weekly housings and Final drives
PTO’s (Pump distributor gears) Check oil level page 343
Hydraulic access ladder Check safety sensor page 347
Hydraulic oil cooler Check and clean as necessary page 349
(1) Perform maintenance according to separate Motor

Operation an Maintenance Manual filed in volume 2
binder.
(2) Perform inspections according to the separate Manual

”FIRE DETECTION AND ACTUATION SYSTEM” filed
in volume 2 binder.
(4) Perform inspection, cleaning and lubrication according

to the separate Instruction Manual ”CRANE HMK 60
Ta1” filed in volume 2 binder.
306
Signal horn compressor Lubricate page 351
Check for leakages and clean

Oil cooler fan bearing housings page 351
breather filters
Automatic lubrication systems Clean in-line grease screens page 353
Cab, air filter Clean or replace filter element page 355
Every 250 operating Air conditioning for operator’s cab Inspection, refer also to the
page 357
hours or monthly and switch cabinets separate manual (3)
Windshield washer system Check fluid level page 361

Main drive motors Checks (1)
Fire suppression system (if so

Inspection (2)
equipped)
Batteries Check fluid level page 363
Every 500 operating Crawler tracks Inspection page 365

hours or quarterly
Fire detection and actuation
Maintenance (2)
system (if so equipped)

binder.
(2) Perform inspections according to the separate Manuals

”FIRE DETECTION AND ACTUATION SYSTEM” and
”FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM” filed in volume 2
binder.
”OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AC” filed in volume 2
binder.
CAUTION
Carry out initial service according to item 4.6.1.
307
Check for correct tightening

High strength bolt connections page 371
torque and security
- Replace return and pressure

filter elements
- Clean or replace high pressure
Hydraulic system filter elements page 427
- Replace breather filter ele-
ments
- Drain sediments
PTO’s (Pump distributor gears)

Oil sample analysis page 441
Swing gears and Travel gears
Every 1000 operating Signal horn compressor Clean and lubricate page 443
hours or every
Hydraulic track tensioning system Check pressure accumulators page 445
6 months
Water filter for hand wash sink in
Replace carbon filter cartridge page 447
Operator’s cab
Hydraulic oil cooler doors and Inspect and lubricate door
page 449
machinery house doors hinges
Slip ring unit Lubricate page 453
Main drive motors Bearing lubrication (1)
Fire suppression system Maintenance (2)
Air conditioning Inspect the complete system (3)

binder.

”FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM” filed in volume 2
binder.
”OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AC” filed in volume 2
binder.
CAUTION
Carry out initial service according to item 4.6.1.
308
- Change oil (*)

Hydraulic system - Replace suction strainers (*) page 455
- Replace pulsation damper
Every 2000 operating
hours or yearly. Emergency escape ladder Inspect page 467
Fire detection and actuation sys-

Maintenance (3)
tem
Swing gears and Motor adapter
Change oil page 469
housings
Every 3000 operating Travel gears, Motor adapter hous-
hours however at least Change oil page 477
ings and Final drives
once a year.
PTO’s (Pump distributor gears) Change oil page 481
Main drive motors Inspection (1)
(*) The hydraulic oil change intervals can be extended for a further time period, when an oil sample analysis
shows a positive result. When extending the oil change interval, it is necessary to carry out an oil sample
analysis after every 1000 operating hours.
However, it is recommended to change the hydraulic oil and the suction strainers after 6000 operating
hours at the latest.
REMARK
The pulsation damper of the hydraulic oil cooler circuit must be replaced after every 2000 operating
hours.
(1) Perform maintenance according to separate Motor Operation an Maintenance Manual filed in volume 2
binder.
(3) Perform inspections according to the separate Manual FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM filed in volume 2
binder.
NOTICE
The Lubrication oil Pumps for Pump Distributor Gear Lubri-
cation should be replaced with new pumps after every 5000
OPERATING HOURS.
4.6.4 MAINTENANCE OF THE MAIN DRIVE MOTORS

● All maintenance has to be carried out in accordance with the
separate Installation and Maintenance Manual
"Horizontal and Vertical Mounted Three Phase Squirrel Cage
Induction Machines Type AMA 400 - 500".
This manual is part of the volume 2 binder
"Motor and Equipment Manuals".
● The lubrication interval, the amount and type of grease for the
Drive end and Non-drive end bearings of the rotor shaft are
given on the rating plate located on each motor. Follow these
instructions for bearing lubrication.
309
Lubrication Chart
310
REPLACEMENT OF HYDRAULIC HOSE LINES
Hydraulic Hose lines are subjected to natural aging. Hence, their

usable lifetime is limited to maximum 6 years.
CAUTION
The maximum permissible storage time of hydraulic hose
lines is 2 years. This storage period is part of the usable life-
time and must be considered when a new hose line is being
installed. If, for example, a hose line with a one year storage
time shall be installed, the remaining service life of the hose
line is 5 years. The production year and the ordering number
of the hydraulic hose lines is stamped on the hose fittings.
All hydraulic hose lines of the Excavator have to be replaced after

every 6 years at the latest, even if there are no visible damages.
WARNING
Repairs on hydraulic hoses and hose lines are not allowed.
Use ONLY GENUINE KMG Replacement Hydraulic Hose
Lines.
INSPECTION OF HYDRAULIC HOSE LINES
Inspect all hoses, hose lines and fittings periodically. Check for
leaks and damages. Replace damaged parts without delay.
Hydraulic fluid escaping under pressure can cause serious inju-
ries and fire break out.
Some examples of faults on hydraulic hoses requiring replace-

ment of the concerned part:
● Damages on the outer layer (e.g. chafed spots, cuts or

scratches).
● Brittle top layers. Flaws on the hose material
● Distortion of the hose line (strong deviation from the original

shape) under pressurized and pressureless conditions or
when bent, e.g. disintegration of hose layers or blistering.
● Leaks
● Detachment of hose and fitting. Damaged hose fitting
311
4.7 WHEN NECESSARY MAINTENANCE
4.7 WHEN NECESSARY
312
MAINTENANCE 4.7 WHEN NECESSARY
4.7.1 SWING CIRCLE TOOTHING LUBRICATION

See illustration Z 20850
All teeth of the ring gear (3) must be completely covered with
grease.
If teeth are not completely covered with grease, they have to be

lubricated immediately with special adhesive spray grease, illust.
(Z 0148) or spread type adhesive grease as specified in the Parts
Catalog. The spread type grease can be applied, for example,
with a brush.
Observe the instructions on the grease container for correct use

of the lubricant.
NOTICE
● If the machine is equipped with gear ring guard (6),
remove covers (7) for swing circle teeth inspection.
● If the automatic lubrication system of the swing circle-

teeth, is out of function for more than one shift, lubricate
manually (using spray grease) and remove the lube pin-
ion (5), to prevent serious damages.
● In order to ensure proper adherence of the lubricant,

clean and dry the ring gear prior lubrication.
In most cases it is sufficient to rotate the superstructure
several times for removing moisture from the gear teeth.
● Make sure that the multi-purpose grease of the swing cir-

cle bearing does not come in contact with the teeth of the
swing circle because this will diminish lubrication capa-
bility of the swing circle teeth lubricant.
If necessary remove excessive multi-purpose grease
from the swing circle above the dust seal ring.
313
314
4.7.2 AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS FILL GREASE CONTAINERS

Fill the grease containers of the Central Lubrication System and
Swing circle pinion Lubrication System when the corresponding
message "grease container on reserve" is displayed on the ECS
screen. Make sure the grease filters in the filling lines are not
obstructed. If necessary service the Grease Filters.
(1) Coupling on swing down service arm for filling the

grease container (3) of the Swing circle gear Lubri-
cation System "SLS"
(2) Grease filter for Swing circle gear Lubrication Sys-

tem "SLS" grease container.
Before filling the grease container make sure the fil-
ter is not obstructed.
Service the filter element according to instructions
on page 317.
(3) Grease container of the Swing circle gear Lubrica-
tion System "SLS"
(4) Hydraulic motor with pump unit
(5) Grease pressure gauge for "SLS"

(6) Receiver panel on swing down service arm
(7) Coupling on swing down service arm for filling the

grease container (9) of the Central Lubrication Sys-
tem "CLS"
(8) Grease filter for Central Lubrication System "CLS"

grease container.
Before filling the grease container make sure the fil-
ter is not obstructed.
Service the filter element according to instructions
on page 317.
(9) Grease container of the Central Lubrication System
"CLS"
(10) Hydraulic motor with pump unit
(11) Grease pressure gauge for "CLS"
(12) Mounting bolts of the grease container housing
● Fill the grease containers according to the instructions on

page 276.
REMARK
Check mounting bolts (12) on front and rear side of the
grease container housing for correct tightening torque.
315
316
Service the Grease Filters for Refillable Grease Containers of

the Central Lubrication System and Swing circle pinion
Lubrication System, illustration Z 20718
1. Screw off filter case.
2. Remove element assy. (02) and clean. Take care not to con-
taminate the ”Clean” inside of the element when flushing.
NOTICE
Carefully inspect elements for damage. Always install new
elements if ruptures or other damages are found.
3. Inspect O-rings (03 and 05) and back-up ring (04). Replace if
necessary.
4. Fill filter case half way up with the specified grease.
5. Installation sequence vice versa. Take care for proper posi-

tion of filter element (02).
NOTICE
Replace element (02) after three cleanings or after every 5000
operating hours, whichever occurs first.
317
318
4.7.3 TRACK ROLLERS AND GUIDE WHEELS - REPLACE FLOATING

SEALS
(1) Guide wheel, if leakage occurs. replace floating seal.

Refer to repair manual for replacement procedure.
(2) Carrier roller, if leakage occurs. replace floating seal.

(3) Track roller, if leakage occurs. replace floating seal.
319
4.8 EVERY 10 OPERATING HOURS OR DAILY MAINTENANCE
4.8 EVERY 10 OPERATING HOURS OR DAILY
320
MAINTENANCE 4.8 EVERY 10 OPERATING HOURS OR DAILY
4.8.1 WALK - AROUND INSPECTION
WARNING
Before carry out any maintenance on this machine, make
sure the mounting ladder, handrails and walkways are prop-
erly installed and in good condition. Keep the ladder, steps,
handrails and walkways free of mud, oil and grease.
Always use the ladder, handrails and steps to get on or off
the machine. Jumping on or off the machine can cause an
injury.
(1) Working attachment. Check overall condition. Inspect for loose

or missing securing parts.
(2) Hydraulic cylinders. Check cylinders, hydraulic lines and connec-

tions for leakage and damage.
(3) Check bucket teeth for proper mounting. Inspect for loose or
missing securing parts.
Check condition of the loader bucket. Both loader bucket ver-
sions, bottom dump bucket and backhoe bucket are equipped
with wear protection packages as specified in the contract.
These wear packages protect the base body of the bucket from
premature wear and tear. Therefore it is important to check the
condition of the wear protection elements regularly. Worn or
damaged protection elements should be replaced at an early
stage in order to prevent damage to the base body of the bucket.
In case the bucket base is already weakened, reconditioning
measures will be necessary. Contact your Komatsu dealer for
support.
(4) Check guide wheels for leakage.
(5) Check carrier rollers for leakage.
(6) Check track rollers for leakage.
(7) Check travel gears for leakage

(8) Check condition, fastening and security of cable drum
(9) Check condition and security of power cable
(10) Check swing circle toothing for adequate lubrication.

(11) Check condition, fastening and security of access ladders.
(12) Check condition, fastening and security of all walk-ways, steps,

railings and hand rails.
(13) Make a visual inspection of the machinery house.
(14) Check condition and fastening of automatic lubrication system
(15) Check condition of the Operator’s cab, check door lock for cor-
rect functioning.
321
322
Legend for illustration Z22664 (continued)
(16) Check condition, fastening and security of

emergency escape ladder
(17) Check condition of the main drive motors. See

separate motor manual for more information
(18) Check condition and fastening of pump dis-

tributor gears and hydraulic pumps
(19) Check hydraulic oil level
(20) Check condition and fastening of swing gears
(21) Check condition and fastening of hydraulic oil

coolers
(22) Check condition and fastening of main control

valves
(23) Check to make sure that the high voltage

switch cabinet door is locked
(24) Check function of controls and monitors in the

operator’s cab
NOTICE
If any damages, failures or wrong condition, have been found
during the inspection, corrective action must be taken.
323
324
WORKING ATTACHMENT - CHECK GREASE

INJECTORS FOR PROPER OPERATION
NOTICE
There are two types of grease injectors installed “SL1” and
“SL11” injectors, see illust. (Z 19721).
A Injectors on bucket
B Injectors on stick
C Injectors on boom
(1) Indicator stem for visual indication of injector opera-

tion
(2) Output adjusting screw

(3) Protection cap
(4) Grease fitting
(5) Distributor ledge, stick

(6) Boom
(7) Distributor ledge, boom
Check operation of all grease injectors (A, B and C) by visually

watching the cycle indicator stem (1) while operating the central
lubrication system manually. Stem (1) must move in and out once
a complete lubrication cycle.
If a cycle indicator (1) does not move during a lubrication cycle,

grease supply to the lubrication point of the concerned injector is
interrupted.
Refer to paragraph "CORRECTIVE ACTIONS" in this section and

to the separate manual "Lubrication Systems" in volume 2 binder
for corrective action.
Carry out same checks on the injectors for slewing connection.
325
326
CHECK GREASE INJECTORS
(D) Injectors on slewing connection
(1) Indicator stem for visual indication of injector opera-

tion
(3) Protection cap
(4) Grease fitting
Check operation of all grease injectors (D) by visually watching

the cycle indicator stem (1) while operating the central lubrication
system manually. Stem (1) must move in and out once a complete
lubrication cycle.
If a cycle indicator (1) does not move during a lubrication cycle,
grease supply to the lubrication point of the concerned injector is
interrupted, proceed according to paragraph CORRECTIVE
ACTIONS.
NOTICE
If the failure is caused through a defective central lubrication
system, manually lubricate at grease fittings (4) after removal
of caps (3).
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
1. Check to make sure grease supply through inlet line is pro-

vided.
2. Disconnect the outlet line of the respective injector.
3. Operate the central lubrication system manually.
❍ A-
If now the injector works, i.e. cycle indicator stem (1)
moves in and out the disconnected line or the grease
passage at the lubrication point is damaged or blocked by
foreign matter. Repair as necessary.
❍ B-
If the injector does not work, i.e. cycle indicator stem (1)
stationary, replace the respective injector.
4. Operate the central lubrication system and re-check opera-

tion of the grease injectors.
REMARK
If the failure is caused through a defective central lubrication
system, manually lubricate at grease fittings (4) after removal of
caps (3).
327
328
SWING CIRCLE - CHECK GREASE INJECTORS
E- Injectors for swing circle teeth lubrication
(1) Indicator stem for visual indication of injector operar-

tion
(7) Slew gear ring
(8) Slew gear ring
(9) Slew gear ring guard (if so equipped)
(10) Inspection covers for slew gear ring
Check operation of injectors “E”.

If necessary lubricate manually, using spray grease.
REMARK
If the machine is equipped with gear ring guard (9), remove
covers (10) for gear ring inspection.
329
330
4.8.2 TRACK GROUPS - CLEAN

Illustration Z 19706
Under working conditions with excessive material build up on the

crawler components, cleaning of the crawlers is very important to
prevent damage.
Material build up on guide wheels, drive sprockets and tracks can

lead to over tensioning of the tracks, resulting in severe damage
to these components.
If there is danger of frost, the tracks must also be cleaned.
NOTICE
Use a suitable cleaning device for removing dirt, mud and
debris from the tracks, rollers, guide wheels and sprockets.
331
4.9 EVERY 50 OPERATING HOURS OR WEEKLY MAINTENANCE
4.9 EVERY 50 OPERATING HOURS OR WEEKLY
332
MAINTENANCE 4.9 EVERY 50 OPERATING HOURS OR WEEKLY
4.9.1 SWING GEARS AND MOTOR ADAPTER HOUSINGS - CHECK OIL

LEVELS
REMARK
The machine can be equipped either with a swing gear of
manufacturer "L&S" or of manufacturer "Siebenhaar". Refer to the
data plate on each swing gear housing to find out the manufac-
turer of the swing gear.
Swing Gear manufactured by "L&S"
I Front Swing gear
II Rear Swing gear
Swing gears
(A) Position of oil level gauge for checking the oil levels
(1) Oil level gauge

(2) Oil filler plug
(3) Breather filter
(10) Drain coupling or evacuation nozzles for Wiggins

system
Motor Adapter Housing
(4) Oil level gauge and filler opening. This opening can
also be used for connecting a suction pump when
changing the oil.
(5) Breather filter
(6) Oil drain plug
CHECK SWING GEAR OIL LEVEL
Remove oil level gauge (1), illustration Z22882 and wipe it clean.
Insert the gauge but DO NOT screw in, see detail ”A”. Remove
the gauge. The oil level should be at the upper mark of gauge (1).
If necessary add the specified gear oil through filler opening (2).
Remove breather filter (3). Blow out with compressed air from
inside to outside and reinstall.
CHECK MOTOR ADAPTER HOUSING OIL LEVEL
Remove oil level gauge (4) and wipe it clean. Insert the gauge but
DO NOT screw in, see detail ”A”. Remove the gauge. The oil level
should be at the upper mark of gauge (4). If necessary add the
specified oil through filler opening (4).
Remove breather filter (5). Blow out with compressed air from
inside to outside and reinstall.
333
334
Swing gear manufactured by "Siebenhaar"
(1) Swing gear
(2) Brake housing
(3) Compensator oil tank for swing gear
(4) Oil level gauge for swing gear

(5) Oil drain plug for motor adapter housing
(6) Oil level gauge for motor adapter housing
(7) Breather filter for brake housing

(8) Oil level gauge for brake housing
(9) Oil drain plug for brake housing
(10) Breather filter
CHECK SWING GEAR OIL LEVEL
specified gear oil through filler pipe. Remove breather filter (10).
Blow out with compressed air from inside to outside and reinstall.
CHECK BRAKE HOUSING OIL LEVEL
should be at the upper mark of gauge (8).
If necessary add the specified oil through filler opening.
Remove breather filter from pipe (7). Blow out with compressed
air from inside to outside and reinstall.
CHECK MOTOR ADAPTER HOUSING OIL LEVEL
specified oil through filler opening.
335
336
4.9.2 TRAVEL GEARS, MOTOR ADAPTER HOUSINGS AND FINAL DRIVES

CHECK OIL LEVELS
-A- View of the RH Final drive. The configuration of the

LH Final drive is the same.
(1) Travel gear
(2) Oil level gauge
(3) Oil filler plug
(4) Oil drain plug

(5) Connector for breather filter line. The breather filter
is located inside the center frame, see illustration
Z25243 on page 341.
(6) Travel brake housing

REMARK
The travel gear brakes are dry type multiple disk
brakes. DO NOT fill the housings with oil.
(7) Motor adapter housing
(8) Oil level plug
(9) Connector for breather filter line, the breather filter is

located inside the center frame, see illustration
Z25243 on page 341. The port of connector (9) is
also used as oil filler opening.
(10) Oil drain plug
(11) Hydraulic motors
(12) Final drive housing contains the lubricating oil

for sprocket bearing lubrication.
(13) Oil level gauge
(14) Oil filler plug
(15) Oil drain plug

Z25243 on page 341.
337
338
TRAVEL GEAR BOX - CHECK OIL LEVEL
Illustration Z25244:
Remove oil level gauge (2) and wipe it clean. Screw in the gauge
and remove again. Oil level should be at the upper mark of gauge
(2). If necessary add oil through filler opening (3). Insert gauge (2)
and filler plug (3) and tighten securely. Check breather filter (18),
illustration Z25243 on page 341 for restriction. If necessary,
remove breather filters, blow out with compressed air from inside
to outside and reinstall.
MOTOR ADAPTER HOUSINGS - CHECK OIL

LEVEL
Check oil level by removing oil level plugs (8).

Oil level should be at lower edge of openings (8). If necessary,
remove connector (9) for breather filter line and add oil through
filler opening. Install level plugs (8) and screw in breather filter line
connectors (9).
Check breather filter (19), illustration Z25243 on page 341 for
restriction. If necessary, remove breather filters, blow out with
compressed air from inside to outside and reinstall.
FINAL DRIVE HOUSING - CHECK OIL LEVEL
Remove oil level gauge (13) and wipe it clean. Screw in the
gauge and remove again. Oil level should be at the upper mark of
gauge (13). If necessary add oil through filler opening (14). Insert
gauge (13) and filler plug (14) and tighten securely. Check
breather filter (20), illustration Z25243 on page 341 for restriction.
If necessary, remove breather filters, blow out with compressed
air from inside to outside and reinstall.
339
340
TRAVEL GEARS, MOTOR ADAPTER

HOUSINGS AND FINAL DRIVES - CHECK
BREATHER FILTERS
(11) Connector on travel gear box for breather filter (18)
(16) Connectors on motor adapter housing for breather

filter (19)
(18) Breather filters for travel gears

(19) Breather filters for motor adapter housings
(20) Breather filters for final drives
(21) Pilot oil pressure hydraulic lines for releasing the

parking brakes
Check the six breather filters(18, 19 and 20), located inside the
center frame, for restriction. If necessary, remove breather filters,
blow out with compressed air from inside to outside and reinstall.
341
342
4.9.3 PTO’s (PUMP DISTRIBUTOR GEARS) AND OIL RESERVOIR - CHECK

OIL LEVEL
(1) Oil level gauge

(2) Oil filler plug
(3) Breather filter
(4) Oil drain plug
(7) Oil collector reservoir for adapter housings of

hydraulic pumps for fan drives
(8) Breather filter with oil level gauge
(9) Adapter housings for main hydraulic pumps
(10) Oil level plugs
(11) Oil filler plug with breather pipe
(12) Oil drain plug
PUMP DISTRIBUTOR GEARS, CHECK OIL LEVEL:
1. Unscrew level gauge (1) and wipe it clean.
2. Insert gauge (1), but DO NOT screw in, see detail (A).
3. Remove level gauge and read the oil level. The oil level
should be between the “MIN” and “MAX” mark. If necessary,
add oil through filler opening (2) up to the “MAX” mark on
gauge (1).
NOTICE
If the oil level is above the “MAX” mark, drain the oil down
until the oil level is at the “MAX” mark. Too much oil in the
pump distributor gear will cause aeration of the oil.
4. Insert gauge (1) and tighten securely. Remove breather filter

(3). Blow out with compressed air from inside to outside and
reinstall.
343
344
OIL COLLECTOR RESERVOIR - CHECK OIL

LEVEL.
1. Unscrew level gauge (8), illustration Z 20696 and wipe it

clean.
2. Insert gauge (8), but DO NOT screw in, see detail (A).
3. Remove level gauge and read the oil level.

The oil level should be between the "MIN" and "MAX" mark.
If necessary, add oil through filler opening (A) up to the "MAX"
mark on gauge (8).
4. Blow out breather filter with compressed air from inside to

outside. Insert gauge (8) and tighten securely.
NOTICE
If oil starts dropping out at breather (8), check oil seal of
pump drive shaft for damage.
Main Hydraulic Pumps - Check Oil Level in Drive

Shaft Housings
The Oil level should be at the lower edge of level plug opening
(10). If necessary remove filler plug with breather pipe (11) and
add Gear Oil through the filler opening up to the level
opening (10).
Re-install plugs (10 and 11) and tighten securely.
If pump removal becomes necessary, darin the drive shaft hous-
ing oil by removing drain plug (12). Be sure to fill the drive shaft
housing up to the filler opening (10) after mounting of the pump.
NOTICE
If oil starts dropping out at one of the breather pipes (11), the
oil seal ring of the respective pump drive shaft must be
checked and replaced if necessary.
345
346
4.9.4 HYDRAULIC ACCESS LADDER - CHECK SAFETY SENSOR

(A) Access ladder in lowered position
(B) Access ladder in upper position (Working position)
(C) Stop bar
(D) Manual actuator for fire suppression system (if so equipped)
(E) Pull chain for emergency lowering of the access ladder
CAUTION
Use this chain only in emergency cases, when the Operator
does not respond to other communication signals.
(S84) Ladder control switch for lowering the ladder
(S84B) Ladder control switch for lifting the ladder
(S84A) Safety switch for emergency lowering of the access ladder. When the chain (E) is being
pulled down with the motor running, the pilot control system is made inoperative, pre-
venting further movements of the Shovel.
(S22) Safety sensor, located on ladder pivot bracket

Function of sensor (S22): Cut out of the pilot control system and actuation of the
hydraulic swing brake with the ladder in lowered position.
(S91) Monitor and control sensor

Function of sensor (S91):
This sensor monitors the ladder position and controls the moving speed of the ladder. In
case the sensor (S22) fails to function properly, the sensor (S91) prevents unintended
movement of the ladder.
(S33A) Emergency shutdown switch for both motors
Check Safety Sensor (S22) as follows:
With the ladder completely lowered (position A) start the motor.

Hold an iron part (screw driver) in front of sensor (S22).
The ladder must not start to move.
If the ladder starts to move, immediately remove the iron part from
the sensor.
WARNING
● Inform the Service Staff about the malfunction of the lad-
der sensor.
● DO NOT operate the Excavator before the failure has

been eliminated and the sensors function properly.
347
348
4.9.5 HYDRAULIC OIL COOLERS - INSPECT AND CLEAN IF NECESSARY

WARNING
● Provide adequate working platform for safe access to the
hydraulic oil coolers.
● Before removing mounting bolts (1) of the hydraulic oil

cooler door (2) check to make sure that all door hinges
are in good condition and properly fastened on their car-
rier frames. If cracks are found at the welded joints of the
hinges, DO NOT remove mounting bolts (1) otherwise the
cooler door may become detached and fall off. Danger of
accidents. Have the damage repaired as soon as possi-
ble.
1. Loosen mounting bolts (1).
2. Open door (2).
REMARK
Details (A and B) i show LH hinge mounted oil coolers. The
description below applies also to RH mounted oil coolers.
3. Loosen fasteners (3) and swing out oil coolers (4 and 5).
4. Secure door (2) and oil coolers (4 and 5) with locking bars
(7, 8 and 9).
5. Clean the oil coolers with compressed air. Direct the air flow
from inside to outside.
6. After cleaning, bring back the oil coolers to their home posi-
tion.
PROCEED AS FOLLOWS
● Disengage locking bars (7, 8 and 9) and bring them in storage

position (10).
● Swing back inner cooler (5). Take care guide pin (A) fits into
hole (B) of main frame (6). Secure cooler (5) with fastener (3).
● Swing back outer cooler (4); observe (A - B) and secure with

fastener (3).
● Close door (2); observe (B - A). Install mounting bolts (1) and
tighten securely.
NOTICE
When cleaning the oil coolers, inspect also laying and fas-
tening of the hydraulic oil lines.
349
4.10 EVERY 250 OPERATING HOURS OR MONTHLY MAINTENANCE
4.10 EVERY 250 OPERATING HOURS OR MONTHLY
350
MAINTENANCE 4.10 EVERY 250 OPERATING HOURS OR MONTHLY
4.10.1 SIGNAL HORN COMPRESSOR - LUBRICATE

The compressor (2) is located in the cab base.

Fill several drops of thin oil into the lubricator (1).
The oil must be free from resin and acid and must have the lowest
solidifying-point possible (below - 40° C).
REMARK
If the Excavator is equipped with a second signal horn there
is also a second compressor which has to be lubricated in the
same way as the first one.
4.10.2 HYDRAULIC OIL COOLER FAN BEARINGS - CHECK FOR LEAKAGE

AND CLEAN BREATHER FILTER
Check housing (1) for leakage. If leakage is found, check the oil
level in the bearing housing. Remove oil level plug (2). The oil
level should be at lower edge of the opening. If necessary add oil
through the breather filter adapter pipe. Clean breather filter (3)
with compressed air from inside to outside and install plug (2) and
breather filter (3). Oil loss of the bearing housing indicates worn or
damaged seal rings. To prevent damage to the fan bearings,
install new seal rings.
4.10.3 RADIATOR FAN BEARINGS - CHECK FOR LEAKAGE AND CLEAN

BREATHER FILTER (DIESEL VERSION ONLY)
Check housing (1) for leakage. If leakage is found, check the oil
level in the bearing housing. Remove oil level plug (2). The oil
level should be at lower edge of the opening. If necessary add oil
through the breather filter adapter pipe. Clean breather filter (3)
with compressed air from inside to outside and install plug (2) and
breather filter (3). Oil loss of the bearing housing indicates worn or
damaged seal rings. To prevent damage to the fan bearings,
install new seal rings.
351
352
4.10.4 AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS - CLEAN IN-LINE GREASE

FILTER AND CHECK BREATHER FILTER
(1) Grease container of swing circle pinion lubrication

system
(2) Grease container of central lubrication system
(3) Breather filters
Components of In-Line-Grease-Filter:
(12) Filter element
(18) Plug screw
(19) Packing ring
(20) Filter housing
(21) Spring
(22) Spring guide
WARNING
Before servicing stop the engine/motor and remove ignition
key in order to prevent operation of the system. Be sure to
vent system pressure before removing plug (18).
A blocked filter can disintegrate under pressure and damage the

automatic lube system.
Service the in-line grease filter
1. Unscrew plug (18), illustration Z 22726, using 36 mm width

wrench and remove packing ring (19).
2. Take out spring (21), spring guide (22) and element (12).
Clean all parts and inspect for damage. Replace as neces-
sary.
3. Assemble all parts according to the illustration. Make sure all

sealing surfaces are clean. Take care for proper position of
spring guide (22). Install plug screw (18) with new packing
ring (19) and tighten with a wrench.
Check breather filter
Check condition and fastening of breather filters (3). If necessary

clean the breather filter with compressed air. For removal of the
breather filter it is necessary to lift off the container cover. Make
sure the breather filter mounting nut inside the cover is securely
tightend before lowering the cover onto the container.
353
354
4.10.5 CAB AIR CLEANER - CLEAN OR REPLACE FILTER ELEMENT
(1) Air cleaner housing located on cab base
(2) Filter element
(3) Cab base wall
(4) Seal ring
(5) Cab blower
(6) Blower housing
(7) Air hose to base roof
(8) Air hose to cab bottom
Clean and inspect filter element (2) as follows:
1. Remove air cleaner housing (1).
2. Remove and inspect element (2). If any rupture, holes or

damaged gaskets are discovered replace the element.
3. If the element is useable clean with compressed air from

inside to outside and re-install.
4. Inspect seal ring (4), housing (6) and air hoses (7-8) for cor-
rect fastening and tightness.
355
356
4.10.6 AIR CONDITIONING FOR OPERATOR’S CAB AND SWITCH

CABINETS
Air conditioning for Operator’s Cab
(1) Refrigerant compressor Type 4FC-5.2Y. Carry out maintenance according to the sepa-
rate Operating Instructions "KB-100-1" filed in volume 2 binder.
(2) Air conditioner unit
(3) Sight glass for checking refrigerant filling

(4) Shut-off valves each side of dryer cartridge
(5) Dryer cartridge
(6) Refrigerant collector reservoir

(7) Condenser
(8) Condenser blower
(9) Low pressure switch
(10) High pressure switch
(11) Expansion valves
(12) Evaporator blower

(13) Evaporator
(14) Cool air outlets
● Checking the refrigerant level:
Switch on air conditioning equipment and run at maximum capac-

ity for approx. 5 minutes. Observe inspection glass (3). A refriger-
ant flow loaded with bubbles or foam indicates a lack of
refrigerant. In this case well equipped refrigeration specialists
must check the circuit for tightness and must add the missing
quantity or refrigerant. If more than 200 grams per year are lost,
the oil level of the refrigerant compressor must also be checked.
This is a special procedure and must be carried out by refrigera-
tion specialists only. Isolated small bubbles in the inspection glass
may be neglected. Even with an absolutely tight equipment a cer-
tain amount of refrigerant is lost through the walls of the hoses.
Therefore a small annual replenishment of the refrigerant quantity
is normal. The dryer cartridge (5) must be replaced after every
1000 operating hours or once a year by refrigeration specialists.
Clean the filter mats of condenser (7) and evaporator (13).
CAUTION
Servicing of the air conditioning systems is restricted to
workshops especially equipped for this purpose. Refer to the
separate manual ”AIR CONDITIONING” in Service Literature
Binder – Volume 2 for more information.
357
358
Air Conditioning for medium and high Voltage

Switch Cabinets
(1) Refrigerant compressor

(2) Control and Evaporator unit
(3) Condenser unit
(4) Dryer cartridge
(5) Sight glass for checking refrigerant filling. The

sight glass can be seen through an opening on
the front panel of the air conditioner housing.
(6) Collector reservoir
Checking the refrigerant level
Switch on air conditioning equipment and run at maximum capac-

ity for approx. 5 minutes.
Observe inspection glass (5) at refrigerant tank. A refrigerant flow

loaded with bubbles or foam indicates a lack of refrigerant. In this
case well equipped refrigeration specialists must check the circuit
for tightness and must add the missing quantity or refrigerant. If
more than 200 grams per year are lost, the oil level of the refriger-
ant compressor (1) must also be checked. This is a special proce-
dure and must be carried out by refrigeration specialists only.
Isolated small bubbles in the inspection glass may be neglected.
Even with an absolutely tight equipment a certain amount of

refrigerant is lost through the walls of the hoses.
Therefore a small annual replenishment of the refrigerant quantity

is normal.
The dryer cartridge (6) must be replaced after every 1000 operat-
ing hours or once a year by refrigeration specialists.
CAUTION
Servicing of the air conditioning systems is restricted to
workshops especially equipped for this purpose. Refer to the
separate booklet ”AIR CONDITIONING” in Service Literature
Binder – Volume 2 for more information.
359
360
4.10.7 WINDSHIELD WASHER SYSTEM - CHECK FLUID LEVEL
(1) Water reservoir for windshield washer
(2) Filler cap with suction line

(3) Water pump for windshield washer
(4) Upper washer nozzle for windshield
(5) Not used

(6) Not used
(7) Wiper motor for windshield wiper
(8) Not used
Fill the water reservoir (1) with clear water, add anti-freeze and
cleaning agent as necessary. Filling capacity of the water reser-
voir is 7 liters.
Check washer and wiper system for tightness and carry out a
functional test of both systems.
361
4.11 EVERY 500 OPERATING HOURS OR QUARTERLY MAINTENANCE
4.11 EVERY 500 OPERATING HOURS OR QUARTERLY
362
MAINTENANCE 4.11 EVERY 500 OPERATING HOURS OR QUARTERLY
4.11.1 BATTERIES - CHECK FLUID LEVEL

WARNING
● Batteries give off highly inflammable gas! Never allow
sparks or open flame near the batteries!
● Avoid spilling any electrolyte on hands or clothing.

Repair or replace all broken wires immediately. All termi-
nals must be clean and securely fastened; never paint
connections.
● DO NOT short across or ground any terminals of the bat-

teries.
Check electrolyte level:
NOTICE
The batteries are located below the walkway floor in two sep-
arate boxes. To get access to the batteries remove floor plate
fastening bolts and open the hinged floor plates.
Secure the open floor plates against falling down with the
safety chains provided.
1. Remove the two battery main switch keys (1).
2. Open floor plates (2).
3. Check electrolyte level of batteries (3) see illustr. (Z 0077).
4. If necessary remove filler and breather caps and top up with

clean distilled water.
5. See that contact surfaces of battery terminals are bright.

Clean if necessary and apply some vaseline to the terminal
posts.
WARNING
● Care must be taken that the batteries are not overfilled as
the electrolyte will expand and overflow when the tem-
perature rises.
● On removal always disconnect the ground (-) cables first.

When re-installing the batteries connect the positive (+)
cables first.
363
364
4.11.2 CRAWLER TRACK - INSPECTION
CHECK ADJUSTING RANGE OF GUIDE WHEELS
(Track retensioning range)
GENERAL
The hydraulic track tensioning system, illust. Z 20371 maintains

automatically the correct track tension. The pilot pressure oil of
the travel brake release circuit is used, to pressurize the four
adjusting cylinders (10) and (11). The resulting force moves the
guide wheels toward the front, until the correct track tension is
obtained. External forces acting upon the guide wheels are
absorbed through the pressure accumulators (8A) and (8B).
Legend for illust. Z 20371:
(2) Supply line, pilot pressure from travel brake release circuit
(3) Return oil line (leakage oil)
(4) Valve block
(5) Pressure relief cock for hydraulic track tensioning system.
“C” - Closed (Normal working position)
“O” - Open
(6) Shut-off cock in supply line

“O” - Open (Normal working position)
“C” - Closed
(7) Two stage pilot pressure operated relief valve

(8A) Pressure accumulator, high pressure (150 bar)
(8B) Pressure accumulator, low pressure (31 bar)
(9) Shutoff cocks, RH & LH

“C” - Closed
(10) Track adjusting cylinders, inner
(11) Track adjusting cylinders, outer
(12) Test connectors and vent valves
WARNING
Before working on the hydraulic track tensioning system,
relieve all pressure in the system by opening cock (5), posi-
tion ’0’. After finishing the service work close the pessure
relief cock (5), position ’C’.
365
366
CHECK ADJUSTING RANGE FOR GUIDE WHEELS
(1) Guide wheel
(2) Slide block

(3) Stop plate
“X” Adjusting range for track tension
The adjusting range for track tension is the distance “X” between
guide wheel slide block (2) and stop plate (3). Depending on leng-
htening of the track the slide block (2) may come in contact with
stop plate (3). In such a case, it must be ensured that the track
does not become too loose, Depending on track condition, the
removal of one track pad will restore the adjusting range “X”. If
necessary contact our Service Department for more information.
WARNING
Before working on the track adjusting system, relieve all
pressure in the system by opening the pressure relief cock
(5), see illust. Z 20371 on previous page.
NOTICE
● If removal of a track pad becomes necessary, it must be
done on both tracks in order to maintain the same length
of both tracks.
● During operation, the pressure relief cock (5) must

always be in CLOSED position. Open cock (5) for pres-
sure relieve prior servicing any part of the system, e.g.
removal of a track pad.
367
368
CHECK ADJUSTING RANGE FOR GUIDE WHEELS
NOTICE
The cocks (9), illust. Z 20371 must always be in OPEN posi-
tion. Close only in such cases, when the adjusting cylinders
(10 and 11) must remain under pressure while servicing other
components of the system.
Bleeding the System
1. Make sure pressure relief cock (5) illust. Z 20371 is in closed

position “C”; and shutoff cocks (6 and 9) are in open position
“O”.
2. Start the engine/motor.
3. Slowly open vent valves (12) on all four adjusting cylinders

until bubble free oil flows out. Close the vent valves (12).
4. Move the machine forward and reverse to distribute tension.
5. Check adjusting range “X” according to Illust. (Z 20015) on

previous page.
6. Check the complete system for leakages.
NOTICE
Further track group inspection and wear measurement pro-
cedures should be carried out according to Parts and Ser-
vice News Bulletin No. AH02521 filed in volume 2 binder.
369
4.12 EVERY 1000 OPERATING HOURS OR EVERY 6 MONTH MAINTENANCE
4.12 EVERY 1000 OPERATING HOURS OR EVERY

6 MONTH
370
MAINTENANCE 4.12 EVERY 1000 OPERATING HOURS OR EVERY 6 MONTH
4.12.1 HIGH STRENGTH BOLT CONNECTIONS - CHECK TORQUE LOAD

Check high-strength bolt connections and securing elements for
damage and looseness. If any damages, failures or wrong condi-
tion are found, corrective action must be taken.
NOTICE
● If the torque load is not stated otherwise refer to standard
torque chart for torque data.
● Bolts inserted with Multi-Purpose Grease MPG, KP2K on

thread and head.
REMARK
When selecting the tightening torque observe quality grade
and bolt size
Hydraulic Access Ladder, illust. Z 21136
(01) Hinged ladder
(03) Ladder lifting cylinder
(06) Self locking nut
(17) Ladder bearing assembly
Check condition and fastening of hinged ladder (01), bearing

assembly (17) and hydraulic cylinder (03).
Make sure the self locking nuts (06) are correctly tightened and
have not lost their clamping torque.
Tightening Torque of Self Locking Nuts (06):
● New nut: 1000 Nm
● Used nut: 800 Nm
Clamping Torque of Self Locking Nuts (06):
● New nut: 200 Nm
● Used nut: 20 Nm minimum
If the clamping torque is less than 20 Nm, use a new self

locking nut.
Lubricate both eyes of hydraulic cylinder (03). Make sure both

pivot pins (12 and 13) are properly secured with cotter pins (15).
Check hydraulic lines (23 and 24) for leakage and damage.
Replace as necessary.
371
372
High-Strength Bolt Connections (continued)
Check fastening and condition of railings (A, B, C, D and E),

illust. Z 21670
Bolt size SW * Tightening torque

Reference No.: Grade
mm mm Nm
(1) M12 8.8 19 74
(2) M12 8.8 19 74
(3) M10 8.8 17 43
* SW = Wrench size
NOTICE
Detail (C) shows the bracket for attaching the emergency escape
ladder (storage position).
● Re-tighten mounting bolts to their correct torque and replace

missing or damaged bolts.
373
374
Check fastening and condition of cab base, illust. Z 21671

Reference No.: Grade Qty.
mm mm Nm
(1) M36 10.9 55 3100 8
* SW = Wrench size*

375
376
Check mounting of Operator’s cab, illust. Z 22663
● Check tightening torque of mounting bolts as indicated in the

illustration.
● Check condition and fastening of chains (1).
● Check the silicone oil filled viscous mounts (2) for leakage
and signs of fatigue.
377
378
Check fastening and condition of high voltage switch cabi-

net, illust. Z 21672

mm mm Nm
(1) M30 10.9 46 1770 4
(2) M30 10.9 46 1770 4
* SW = Wrench size* SW = Wrench size

379
380
Check fastening and condition of hydraulic oil cooler,

illust. Z 21673

mm mm Nm
(1) M30 10.9 46 1770 4
(2) M30 10.9 46 1770 4
* SW = Wrench size

381
382
Check fastening and condition of hydraulic oil tank,

illust. Z 21674

mm mm Nm
(1) M30 10.9 46 1770 4
(2) M30 10.9 46 1770 4
* SW = Wrench size

383
384
Check fastening of power house frame (01) to superstructure

main frame, illust. Z 20705

mm mm Nm
(02) M30 10.9 46 1770 28
(03) Washer 28
* SW = Wrench size

385
386
Check fastening and condition of the eight power house

posts (75) and transverse carrier (82), illust. Z 20706

mm mm Nm
(85) M30 10.9 46 1770 48
(86) M24 10.9 36 880 12
* SW = Wrench size

387
388
Power House Doors, illust. Z 20707
● Check fastening and condition of power house doors

(24 - 25) and door hinges (26).
● Check fastening and condition of safety rods (41).
● Check upper pump compartment door locks (35 - 36) for cor-
rect mounting.
● Check lower pump compartment door locks and radiator door

locks (37 - 40) for correct mounting.
● Lubricate door hinges (26) at grease fittings (27).
389
390
Power house Roof, illust. Z 20708
● Check fastening and condition of power house roof segments

(02 - 05).
● Check sealing elements (08) between roof segments for cor-

rect seat and good condition.
● Check sealing elements (11 - 16) between roof segments and

roof frame (01) for correct seat and good condition.

mm mm Nm
(06) M12 10.9 19 108 50
(20) M36 10.9 55 3100 12
* SW = Wrench size

391
392
Check mounting and security of main drive motors and

pump distributor gears, illust. Z 22665
(1) Main drive motor

(2) Flexible coupling
(3) Thrust ring for fastening coupling hub onto motor

shaft
(4) Thrust ring mounting bolt secured with Loctite

(5) Coupling guard
(6) Pump distributor gear
(7) Cooling air outlet duct
Check the following mounting bolts for correct tightening

torque
Bolt size SW * Tightening Qty. both

mm mm torque Nm power units
(8) Adjusting bolts M20 10.9 30 510 12
(9) Lock nuts M20 12
(10) M36 10.9 55 3100 8
(11) M18 10.9 27 360 20
(12) M30 10.9 46 1770 16
(13) M30 10.9 46 1770 8
(14) M12 8.8 19 74 8
● * SW = Wrench size

393
394
● Check fastening and condition of main hydraulic pumps (1-6),

illust. Z 20710.
Mounting bolt size: M20, Grade 8.8, tightening torque
360 Nm.
● Check fastening and condition of auxiliary pumps (8.1 - 8.6)

and secondary hydraulic pumps (10.1 - 10.4).
Mounting bolt size: M12, Grade 8.8, tightening torque 74 Nm.
Pump Description:
(1-6) Main hydraulic pumps, swash plate type for all work-
ing and travelling motions.
(8.1- Gear type pumps.

8.6)
(10.1- Axial piston pumps.
10.4)
395
396
Check fastening and condition of control valve carrier, main

control valves (I, II and III) and swing control valve (5),
illust. Z 21777
Bolt size SW * Tightening

mm mm torque Nm
(1) M24 10.9 36 880 4
(2) M20 10.9 30 510 3

(3) M20 10.9 30 510 9
(4) M16 10.9 24 265 3
(5) Swing control valve
* SW = Wrench size

397
398
Check condition and fastening of both swing gears (01) and

swing motors (02), illust. Z 22514

mm mm Nm
(8) M 16 10.9 24 265 16

(25) M 24 12.9 19 1030 34
* SW = Wrench size

REMARK
After checking and retightening of swing gear mounting bolts
(25), attach protection caps (26) onto the bolt heads.
399
400
Check tightening torque of the counterweight mounting

bolts, illustration Z 21778A

mm mm Nm
(3) Mounting bolts M48 10.9 75 7500 20
* SW = Wrench size

Guideline for transportation and lifting of the counterweight

illustration Z 21778A
(1) A1 and A2 fastening points for vertical transport and for raising up of the
counterweight with two symmetrical ropes
(2) A1, A2 and A3 fastening points for horizontal transport and for loading of the
counterweight with three symmetrical ropes
WARNING
The chambers of the counterweight are filled with a mixture
of concrete, granulated ore and steel pellets. This mixture
can create explosive gases which will accumulate in the
chambers of the counterweight. Before any welding, flame-
cutting, grinding or drilling procedures are carried out on the
counterweight it is vital to expel these gases from the coun-
terweight chambers. Failure to properly expel the gases from
the counterweight chambers can result in an explosion with
chambers.
401
402
Swing circle, illust. Z 20614
Check tightening torque of inner and outer mounting bolts (02 and
04) according to PARTS & SERVICE NEWS, No. AH00511.
NOTICE
Checking/retightening of swing circle mounting bolts is only
necessary after the first 1000 operating hours.
Check condition and fastening of swing circle guard (10) and bolts
(15).
403
404
Check condition and fastening of swivel joint (A),

illust. Z 20865

mm mm Nm
(1) M 16 10.9 24 265 4
(2) M 16 10.9 24 265 8
* SW = Wrench size

405
406
Excavators with Electric Prime Mover
Check condition and fastening of slip ring unit (01),

illust. Z 20616

mm mm Nm
((04) M16 10.9 24 265 4
(05) M16 8.8 24 180 4

(07) M16 8.8 24 180 4
* = Wrench size

407
408
Check condition and fastening of travel gears, sprockets and

travel motors

(1) Travel gear
(2) Sprocket
(3) Travel motors
(4) Outer sprocket bearing
(5) Inner sprocket bearing
(6) Mounting bolts for travel gear to crawler carrier

(7) Mounting bolts for sprocket to hub
(8) Mounting bolts for travel motors
(9) Mounting bolts for outer bearing to crawler carrier

(10) Mounting bolts for inner bearing to crawler carrier
Bolt size SW *1) Tightening torque Qty.

mm mm Nm *2)
(6) M36 10.9 55 3100 80
(7) M36 10.9 55 3100 72
(8) M16 10.9 24 265 32
(9) M30 10.9 46 1770 24
(10) M30 10.9 46 1770 24
*1) SW = Wrench size
*2) Quantity for both final drives

NOTICE
If the outer bolts (9) have been found loose, it is necessary to
check also the inner bolts (10) for looseness.
For this purpose the travel gear assy has to be removed.
Contact your Komatsu Dealer for support.
409
410
Retightening procedure of the crawler carrier

mounting bolts
REMARK
The required tightening torque for the mounting bolts of the
crawler carriers has been determined and applied during the
assembling procedure of the excavator at the mine site. This pro-
cedure has to be repeated one time after the first 1000 operating
hours through your Komatsu dealer.
General
The required tightening torque for all mounting bolts (M48), illus-
tration Z25246 has to be determined with the four measuring bolts
(7), which dimension is analogous to the mounting bolts.
The required axial tensioning force of the bolts (M48) is deter-
mined by means of the elongation of the bolts.
For determination of the tightening torque, two especially pre-
pared measuring bolts (7) are installed on each crawler carrier.
The measuring bolts can be identified by the centering dot at the
bolt head and the milled area at the shaft end.
Necessary equipment for the retightening procedure:
● Measuring device (1 - 6) delivered with the new machine, see

table below.
● Special hydraulic torque wrench, see illustration Z24072 on

page 415. This tool will be provided by your Komatsu dealer.
Measuring Device PN 92847640
Position Part name Part No. Qty.
1 Angle bar 928 475 40 1

2 Dial gauge 092 706 40 1
3 Screw M5x16 502 515 98 1
4 Feeler 477 172 40 1

5 Bolt M10x25 307 777 99 2
6 Washer 517 122 98 2
7 Measuring bolts 913 613 40 4

(installed)
411
412
Procedure for determination of the tightening torque for the

crawler carrier mounting bolts after the first 1000 operating
hours, see illustration Z25246
1. Loosen the two measuring bolts (7) at the left crawler carrier
and the two measuring bolts at the right crawler carrier.
Do not lubricate the measuring bolts.
2. Tighten the four measuring bolts (7) with 150 Nm.
3. Attach the measuring device (1 - 6).
4. Set the dial gauge (2) to the zero position.
5. Attach the special hydraulic torque wrench (1), see illustration

Z24072 on next page to the measuring bolt (7).
6. Increase the pressure at the hydraulic torque wrench until a

torque of 2100 Nm is reached and tighten the measuring bolt.
7. Record the pressure and the change of the bolt length in a

table.
8. Increase the pressure further by steps of 10 bar until the

required elongation of 0.93 mm of the measuring bolts (7) is
reached.
9. Record the corresponding hydraulic pressures in a table.
10. Repeat this procedure on all four measuring bolts (7).
11. Add the 4 determined hydraulic pressures and then divide by

4 to obtain an average value.
12. Now loosen only one of the mounting bolts (M48) and tighten
up to the determined average pressure.
CAUTION
DO NOT loosen more than one bolt at the same time.
DO NOT lubricate the bolts (M48).
13. Repeat this procedure step by step at all of the 156 mounting
bolts (M48) .
413
414
Special hydraulic torque wrench
Legend for illustration Z24072:
(1) Application of the hydraulic torque wrench

(2) Special wrench socket with supporting bar
(P/N 793 376 73)
(3) Hydraulic wrench (P/N 793 374 73)
(4) Electro-hydraulic pump set (P/N 793 375 73)
The equipment shown in illustration Z24072 will be provided by

your Komatsu dealer.
Location of the four measuring bolts (7), illustration Z25247
415
416
Crawler Carrier
Check condition and fastening of guide wheels (01), stop plates

(03) and rollers (06 and 09), illust. Z 20618.
(01) Guide wheel
(02) hydraulic track tensioning cylinders

(03) Stop plates for guide wheel sliding blocks
(06) Support rollers
(09) Bottom rollers
417
418
Check condition and fastening of railings (01/02) and of

steps (03, 04, 05 and 23).
See details (A - D) for mounting parts arrangement.
(A) Mounting assembly for steps (03) to steel pipe, ver-

sion I
(B) Mounting assembly for railing posts to steps (03)
(C) Mounting assembly for steps (03) to boom welded

brackets
(D) Mounting assembly for steps (03) to steel pipe, ver-

sion II
419
420
Cable Drum for Excavators with Electric Prime Mover
● Check condition anf fastening of parts (01 - 06) and (10, 30

and 40), illust. Z 20620
(01) Junction box
(02) Brake motor
(03) Drum body

(04) Cable guide rocker arm
(05) Sliding frame
(06) Drive chain guard

(10) Cable drum carrier frame
(11) Mounting bolts frame (10) to undercarriage center

section
(14) Mounting bolts junction box (01) to frame (10)
(19) Mounting bolts drum (03) to frame (10)
(20) Lock nut
(21) Adjusting screw for drive chain tension
(30) Limit switch, cable end
(40) Actuator lever for limit switch (30)

mm mm Nm
(11) M20 10.9 30 510 40

(14) M20 10.9 30 510 4
(19) M16 10.9 24 265 4
* SW Wrench size
For more information concerning cable drum maintenance refer to

the separate booklet CABLE DRUM in volume 2 binder.
421
422
Roof-mounted service crane

Check condition and fastening of crane base and crane
(1) Crane base
(2) Slew crane

(3) Outrigger
(4) Electric chain hoist or hydraulic rope winch
(5) Safety hook
(6) Electric -.hydraulic power unit

mm mm Nm
(7) M24 10.9 36 880 8
(8) M20 10.9 30 510 10
(9) M20 10.9 30 510 2
(10) M12 8.8 19 74 16
* SW Wrench size
● Re-tighten loose mounting bolts and replace missing bolts.
● Replace self locking nuts which have lost their clamping

torque.
REMARK
For more information concerning crane maintenance refer to
the separate Instruction Manual "MKG CRANE HMK 60 Ta1" filed
in volume 2 binder.
423
424
Roof-mounted crane for grease barrel replacement

Check condition and fastening of the crane
1 Crane post
2 Outrigger
7 Ropes for securing the outrigger (2) in home position
8 Ring for fastening the wire ropes (7).

9 Storage box for hoist chain
10 Crane mounting bolts, M27 quality grade 8.8. Tightening torque 920 Nm.
Be sure to check security and tightening torque of the crane

mounting bolts (10) after the first 100 operating hours and there-
after every 1000 operating hours. Check condition of fastening
ropes (7) and ring (8).
425
426
4.12.2 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM - FILTER SERVICE
R Return of filter location
L Leakage oil filter location

(1) Mounting bolt
(2) Filter cover retainer
(3) Filter cover assy

(4) Return- and leakage filter unit
(5) Oil filler plug

(7) Breather filter
(8) Cover
(9) Gasket
NOTICE
The description of the hydraulic filters appears in the follow-
ing sequence:
● Return- and Leakage oil filters, see page 429
● Breather filter, see page 431
● High pressure filters, see page 433
● Pressure filters on central control and filter frame, see

page 437
427
428
FILTER SERVICE
● Replace return oil filter elements
● Replace leakage oil filter element
● Check filter screens
Follow the steps shown in illust. Z 19336:
1. Loosen bolt (1).
2. Turn retainer (2).
3. Remove cover assy (3). Inspect O-ring (4) and

replace if necessary.
4. Lift out element assy (5).
5. Disassemble filter assy (5) in sequence of ref. nos.

(6 to 12)
6. Discard element (8)
7. Inspect screen (11) and clean if necessary.
NOTICE
Take care not to contaminate the clean inside of the screen
when flushing.
8. Inspect screen (11) and O-ring (12) for damage

replace if necessary.
Install screen (11) use new sealing washer (10) and
self locking nut (9).
9. Reassemble filter assy (5) with new element (8)

according to step 5.
Use new self locking nuts (6).
10. Install filter assy use new gasket (7).

Torque bolt (1) to 850 Nm.
NOTICE
● After each repair of the hydraulic system the elements (8)
should be replaced after about 50 operating hours.
● The filter elements must also be replaced when the fault

message "Filter restriction" is displayd on the ECS
screen.
● Replace screens (11) every 5000 operating hours at the

latest.
429
430
FILTER SERVICE
● Replace breather filter element
● Drain water and sediments from hydraulic oil tank
(6) Hand wheel of main shut-off valve located between

suction oil reservoir and main oil reservoir
● To OPEN the valve, turn hand wheel (6) CCW to
the stop
● To CLOSE the valve, turn hand wheel CW to the

stop
A proximity switch located on the gearbox of the

shut-off valve monitors the valve position. With the
valve not fully open, a corresponding message will
be displayed on the ECS screen in the Operator’s
cab.
REMARK
Before starting the motor, make sure the shut-off
valve is completely open by turning hand wheel (6)
fully to the left (CCW).
Replace Element (C) of Breather Filter (11).
1. Remove nut (A).
2. Remove cover (B).
3. Remove filter element (C).
4. Insert new filter element and reassemble the breather

filter (11).
Drain Water and Sediments
Drain water and sediments with machine standing an level ground

and when machine was out of operation for some time.
Refer to Operation section page 276 for evacuation procedure.
431
432
FILTER SERVICE
High Pressure Filters "HPF", illustration Z 21780
NOTICE
● The filter reference numbers (1 - 6) correspond to the
numbering of the main pumps.
● If, for example, the fault message "High pressure filter #5

restricted" is being displayed on the ECS screen, the fil-
ter number (5) in the illustration has to be serviced. Stop
work and inform Service staff about the fault message.
(1) HPF for pump 1
(2) HPF for pump 2
(3) HPF for pump 3
(4) HPF for pump 4
(5) HPF for pump 5
(6) HPF for pump 6
(7) Drain plug
(8) Filter case

(9) Hexagon
(10) Filter element
(11) Packing ring
(12) O-ring
(13) Back-up ring
(14) O-ring
(15) Filter header
Clean or replace high pressure filter elements:
1. Place working attachment on the ground and shut-off the

motors.
Relieve pressure in the hydraulic system with several move-
ments of the control levers.
2. Place a suitable container below the filter in order to collect

outflowing oil.
3. Remove plug (7) and drain the oil.
4. Screw off filter case (8).
433
434
FILTER SERVICE
High Pressure Filters "HPF", illustration Z 21780
NOTICE
Carefully inspect elements for damage. Always install new
elements if ruptures or other damages are found.
5. Remove element (10) and clean. Take care not to contami-

nate the "Clean" inside of the element when flushing.
6. Inspect O-rings (12 and 14) and back-up ring (13). Replace if
necessary.
7. Install drain plug (7) with new packing ring (11). Fill filter case
(8) half way up with clean hydraulic oil and re-assemble the
filter. Make sure element (10) is properly seated in the filter
head.
8. After short operating period check filter units for leakage.
CAUTION
In case filter element (10) is soiled by metal chips, examine
hydraulic pump for damages. Install new element (10).
NOTICE
If after cleaning of the filter element, the message
"High pressure filter restricted" is displayed again, replace
the filter element.
Replace elements (10) after three cleanings or after every
5000 operating hours, whichever occurs first.
After pump repairs all high pressure filter elements must be
replaced.
435
436
FILTER SERVICE
Replace filter elements of the hydraulic oil pressure filters
NOTICE
When a fault message "Pressure Filter restricted" is dis-
played, stop work and replace element of the corresponding
pressure filter.
(Rr.1) Control and filter panel of rear power unit, motor 1

(Fr.2) Control and filter panel of front power unit, motor 2
(1) Change over valve for operation mode of pump control sys-
tem for rear power unit, motor 1.
(2) Change over valve for operation mode of pump control sys-
tem for front power unit, motor 2.
(3 Not used.
(4) Pressure oil filter for pump distributor gear PTO "1" lubricating
oil. Filter restriction monitored by differential pressure switch
B27-1.
(5) Pressure oil filter for fan drive motor of hydraulic oil cooler "1".
Filter restriction monitored by differential pressure switch
B28-1.
(6) Pressure oil filter for pilot- and pump control oil circuit. Filter
restriction monitored by differential pressure switch B22.
(7) Not used
(8) Pressure oil filter for pump distributor gear PTO "2" lubricating
oil. Filter restriction monitored by differential pressure switch
B27-2.
(9) Pressure oil filter for fan drive motor of hydraulic oil cooler "2".
Filter restriction monitored by differential pressure switch
B28-2.
437
438
FILTER SERVICE
Replace pressure filter elements, illust. Z 22666, as follows:
1. Place working equipment on the ground and shut-off the

motors.
Relieve pressure in the hydraulic system according to
page 254 in the operation section.
2. Place a suitable container below the filter in order to collect

outflowing oil.
3. Remove plug (A) and drain the oil.
4. Unscrew case (C) of the respective filter and clean the filter
case.
5. Discard element (F) with O-ring (G).
6. Inspect O-ring (D) and back-up ring (E), replace if necessary.
7. Install drain plug (A) with new packing ring (B).
8. Lubricate the thread at the filter head and at filter case (C)
with multi-purpose grease K2K.
9. Insert a new element (F) with new O-ring (G).
10. Fill the case (C) half way up with clean hydraulic oil.
11. Screw the case (C) into the head and tighten.
12. After short operating period check filter for leakage.
13. Check restriction indicator (H) for proper mounting and good
condition.
439
440
4.12.3 PTO’S (PUMP DISTRIBUTOR GEARS), SWING GEARS AND TRAVEL

GEARS - OIL SAMPLE ANALYSIS
The oil sample analysis gives information about the grade of con-
tamination and aging of the gear oils. Refer to the tables below for
limits of contamination.
Oil drain plugs, illustration Z25250
(1) PTO (Pump distributor gears)
(2) Swing gears (I and II)
(3) Travel gears
PTO (PUMP DISTRIBUTOR GEAR)
(Oil contamination)
Element Normal Increased Critical
Iron < 100 ppm 100 - 300 ppm > 300 ppm
Copper < 10 ppm 10 - 20 ppm > 20 ppm

Chromium < 5 ppm 5 - 15 ppm > 15 ppm
Silicon < 40 ppm 40 - 60 ppm > 60 ppm
SWING GEARS AND TRAVEL GEARS
(Oil contamination)
Element Normal Increased Critical
Iron < 400 ppm 400 - 700 ppm > 700 ppm
Copper < 25 ppm 25 - 60 ppm > 60 ppm
Chromium < 5 ppm 5 - 15 ppm > 15 ppm
Silicon < 40 ppm 40 - 60 ppm > 60 ppm
NOTICE
If the grade of contamination approaches to the “critical” val-
ues in the above tables, change the gear oil. However, the
regular oil changes must be carried out every 3000 operating
hours or once a year, whichever occurs first.
441
442
4.12.4 SIGNAL HORN COMPRESSOR - CLEAN AND LUBRICATE

Unscrew collector protection cap (2).

Unscrew ball bearing cover and fill it half way up with grease.
If the fins of the collector are very strongly blackened or coated

with verdigris, clean them with emery cloth.
443
444
4.12.5 HYDRAULIC TRACK TENSIONING SYSTEM - CHECK PRESSURE

ACCUMULATORS
WARNING
Before working on any part of the hydraulic track tensioning
system relieve all pressure in the system by opening pres-
sure relief cock (5), illustration Z 20371.
NOTICE
For checking the charging pressure a special testing and fill-
ing device must be used. This device can be ordered from
your Komatsu Dealer.
The testing and filling procedure of the pressure accumula-
tors has to be carried out in accordance with Service Bulletin
No. AH01531.
(2) Supply line, pilot pressure from travel brake release circuit
(3) Return oil line (leakage oil)

(4) Valve block
(5) Pressure relief cock for hydraulic track tensioning system.
“C” - Closed (Normal working position)

“O” - Open
(6) Shut-off cock in supply line
“C” - Closed
(7) Two stage pilot pressure operated relief valve
(8A) Pressure accumulator, high pressure (150 bar)
(8B) Pressure accumulator, low pressure (31 bar)

(9) Shutoff cocks, RH & LH
“C” - Closed
(10) Track adjusting cylinders, inner
(11) Track adjusting cylinders, outer
(12) Test connectors and vent valves
445
446
4.12.6 WATER FILTER - REPLACE FILTER CARTRIDGE
(A) Location of filler neck for water tank (5)
(B) Location of water filter (2), pump (3) and pressure compensation tank (4).
(1) Access cover for water filter compartment
(2) Water filter
(3) Water pump

(4) Pressure compensation tank
(5) Water tank
(6) Water tap
(7) Filler neck for water tank
(8) Relay
(9) Circuit breaker 7,5 A
(10) Refrigerator
Replace filter cartridge of water filter (2) as follows:
1. Open water tap (6) and drain all water from tank (5). Remove
access cover (1). Depress red pressure relief button on filter
header (if so equipped) to relieve pressure.
2. Unscrew bottom of housing. Remove large O-ring, wipe clean

of lubricant and set aside. Remove used cartridge and dis-
card. Rinse out bottom of housing and fill about 1/3 full with
water. Add 2 tablespoons of bleach and scrub cap and bottom
of housing with nonabrasive cloth. Rinse thoroughly.
3. Lubricate O-ring with clean petroleum jelly (Vaseline). Place

O-ring back into groove and smooth into place with finger.
Insert new cartridge over stand pipe in bottom of housing.
Cartridges with tapered ends need to be specifically installed
with the tapered end toward the threads of the housing.
4. Screw bottom of housing onto cap and hand tighten. DO NOT

over-tighten. Make sure cap standpipe slips into cartridge. Fill
water tank (5) with 50 liters of clear water. Depress pressure
relief button (if so equipped) to release trapped air.
5. Open water tap (6) and flush the new filter cartridge for a min-
imum of 5 minutes. The water must be completely clear
before closing the tap.
WARNING
DO NOT drink the water of the cab water system. The cab
water system is not constructed as a drinking water system.
447
448
4.12.7 HYDRAULIC OIL COOLER - INSPECT AND LUBRICATE DOOR

HINGES
WARNING
hydraulic oil cooler.
● Check all door hinges (2) for good condition and proper
fastening to their carrier frames. If cracks or distortion at
the weld area of the hinges are found corrective action
must be taken. DO NOT try to open the cooler doors
before the damage has been repaired otherwise the
cooler door may become detached and fall off. Danger of
accidents.
(1) Hydraulic oil cooler
(2) Cooler hinges
(3) Grease fitting
(4) Cotter pin
● Lubricate all cooler hinges (2) at grease fittings (3).
● Check to make sure that the hinge pins are properly secured
with cotter pins (4).
449
450
4.12.8 MACHINERY HOUSE DOORS - INSPECT AND LUBRICATE DOOR

HINGES
WARNING
rear machinery house doors (2).
● Check all door hinges (3) for good condition and proper
fastening to their carrier frames. If cracks or distortion at
the weld area of the hinges are found corrective action
must be taken.
(1) Radiator doors (on Diesel engine powered shovels only)
(2) Rear doors of machinery house
(3) Door hinges
(4) Grease fitting
(5) Cotter pin
● Lubricate all door hinges (3) at grease fittings (4).
● Check to make sure that the hinge pins are properly secured
with cotter pins (5).
451
452
4.12.9 SLIP RING UNIT - LUBRICATE

● Lubricate ball bearing of slip ring bearing (1), illustration
Z 20378 at the four grease fittins (2).
● Check condition, fastening and security of the slip ring unit.
WARNING
Make sure the main power supply is switched off prior to
open the slip ring housing or work on the unit.
453
4.13 EVERY 2000 OPERATING HOURS OR YEARLY MAINTENANCE
4.13 EVERY 2000 OPERATING HOURS OR YEARLY
454
MAINTENANCE 4.13 EVERY 2000 OPERATING HOURS OR YEARLY
4.13.1 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM - CHANGE OIL, REPLACE SUCTION

STRAINERS AND PULSATION DAMPER
NOTICE
The hydraulic oil change intervals can be extended for a fur-
ther time period, when an oil sample analysis shows a posi-
tive result. When extending the oil change interval, it is
necessary to carry out an oil sample analysis after every
1000 operating hours.
However, it is recommended to change the hydraulic oil and
the suction strainers after 6000 operating hours at the latest.
The pulsation damper must be replaced after every 2000
operating hours.
(1) Main oil reservoir
(2) Oil filler plug

(4) Return oil collector pipe
(5) Drain coupling for collector pipe
(6) Drain coupling for main oil reservoir

(7) Hand wheel of main shut-off valve
(8) Main shut-off valve
(9) Compensator between main oil reservoir and suction oil reservoir. Check condition and
tightness of compensator and connected parts.
(10) Return oil strainer
(11) Bolt
(12) Bolt
(13) Intermediate pipe
(14) Gasket
(15) Gaskets
Evacuate main hydraulic oil reservoir according to section

Central Refilling System on page 276.
Attach drain hose (part of tool set) to coupling (5) and drain oil
from return oil collector pipe (4). Drain also the oil from return oil
manifold, see illustration Z 21785 and from suction oil reservoir,
see illustration Z 21787.
REMARK
Replace return oil strainer (10), illustration Z 21782 after
major repairs on the hydraulic system and after every 6000 oper-
ating hours. Use new gaskets (14 and 15).
With hydraulic oil reservoir empty, service the return oil filters and
inspect the reservoir for sediments. Clean the reservoir if neces-
sary.
455
456
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM - CHANGE OIL, REPLACE

SUCTION STRAINERS AND PULSATION DAMPER
(1) Return oil collector manifold

(2) Drain coupling
(3) Pulsation damper
(4) Return oil collector pipe

(5) Main control valves
(6) Swing control valve
NOTICE
from return oil collector manifold (1). Remove pulsation damper
(3) and install new pulsation damper with new O-ring.
457
458

(6) Hand wheel of main shut off valve between main oil
reservoir and suction oil reservoir
● To open the valve, turn hand wheel (6) CCW to
the stop
● To close the valve, turn hand wheel (6) CW to

the stop
NOTICE
Before starting the motors, make sure the shut
off valve is completely open by turning the hand
wheel (6) fully to the left (CCW).
(11) Compensator
(12) Intermediate pipe
(13) Gaskets
(14) Suction oil strainer
(16) Drain coupling
from suction oil reservoir. Remove intermediate pipe (12) and
strainer (14). Install new strainer (14) with new gaskets (13).
REMARK
There are six further strainers installed in the suction oil reser-
voir (15). Refer to page 461 for replacement instructions.
459
460

(I-VI) Main Hydraulic pumps
(D) Location of the suction strainers for the six main

pumps
(05-06) Main pump suction lines
(8) Secondary hydraulic pumps on PTO gear 1
(9) Secondary hydraulic pumps on PTO gear 2

(10) Suction hose elbow
(11) Gaskets
(12) Suction strainer for the six main pumps
(14) Plug
(15) Port of leakage oil return line, use this port as Oil
level and filler opening for the main pump housing
Replace Suction Strainer of Main Pumps
1. Remove elbows (10), of all six main pump suction hoses (D),
from suction oil reservoir.
2. Remove gaskets (11) and strainer (12) and discard.
3. Insert new strainer (12) with new gaskets (11) and mount suc-
tion hose elbow (10) onto the suction oil reservoir.
4. Check to make sure that the hose clamps of suction hoses

(D) are in good condition and properly fitted.
461
462

FILLING THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
1. Make sure main shut-off valve is in open position and all con-
nections are securely tightened.
REMARK
Select hydraulic oil viscosity grade according to ambient tem-
peratures.
If the new hydraulic oil has a different viscosity grade compared
with the drained oil it is necessary to enter the new viscosity
grade into the appropriate ”Excavator Components” group of
the ECS Menu Control.
2. On machines equipped with Central Refilling System fill main

hydraulic oil reservoir according to section
"Central Refilling System" on page 276.
On machine without central refilling system fill main oil reser-
voir through opening (4), illustration Z22878. Depending on
type of attachment and the present oil temperature, select the
applying oil level range on plate (3). Be sure to use the cor-
rect marking on oil level plate (3).
(2) Hydraulic oil level sight gauge
(3) Oil level plate
(4) Oil filler plug
463
464

Vent Hydraulic pumps
1. Open vent plug (13), illust. Z 22513 on the pump suction port
of all six main pumps.
2. As soon as bubble free oil flows out, tighten the vent plug
(13).
3. Open vent screw on secondary pumps (8 and 9), illustration

Z 21171. Close vent screw as soon as bubble free oil flows
out.
4. Open vent plug (13) on the pump suction port of the piggy-
back gear pumps and wait until bubble free oil flows out then
tighten the vent plugs (13).
5. Check hydraulic oil level and the whole hydraulic system for
leakage.
Check the Oil level in all six Main Pump Housings (I - VI),
illust. 21171:
1. Remove leakage oil return line from port (15). The oil level in
the pump housing should reach the lower edge of port (15).
2. If necessary add hydraulic oil up to the lower edge of the filler

opening.
3. Connect leakage oil return line to port (15).
NOTICE
Make sure the main pump housings are correctly filled, oth-
erwise the pump drive shaft bearings could be damaged due
to lack of lubrication.
465
466
4.13.2 EMERGENCY ESCAPE LADDER - INSPECTION
(1) Sliding window, serves also for emergency exit
(2) Release lever for hinged railing bar (3)
(3) Hinged railing bar
(4) Rigidly mounted emergency escape ladder

(5) Rope ladder. The upper end of the rope ladder is
fixed onto the lower rung of the rigid escape ladder
(4) by means of the fasteners (6), see detail (X). The
lower end of the rope ladder is fixed on brackets (8)
and secured with rubber fasteners (7), see section
(A-A).
(6) Hooks for fastening the rope ladder onto the rigid
ladder (4)
(7) Rubber fasteners for rope ladder in lifted position

(8) Bracket for rope ladder in lifted position. The lower
rung of the rope ladder is hooked up into the brack-
ets (8)
● Check rigidly mounted emergency escape ladder (4) for good

condition and proper fastening.
● Check rope ladder (5) for good condition and proper fasten-
ing.
If any damage or bad condition is found replace the concerned

parts without delay.
467
4.14 EVERY 3000 OPERATING HOURS HOWEVER AT LEAST ONCE A YEAR MAINTENANCE
4.14 EVERY 3000 OPERATING HOURS HOWEVER AT

LEAST ONCE A YEAR
468
MAINTENANCE 4.14 EVERY 3000 OPERATING HOURS HOWEVER AT LEAST ONCE A YEAR
4.14.1 SWING GEARS AND MOTOR ADAPTER HOUSING - CHANGE OIL
REMARK
The machine can be equipped either with a swing gear of
manufacturer "L&S" or of manufacturer "Siebenhaar". Refer to the
data plate on each swing gear housing to find out the manufac-
turer of the swing gear.
Swing gear manufactured by "L&S"
Swing gears
(1) Oil level gauge
(2) Oil filler plug

(3) Breather filter
(10) Drain couplings or evacuation nozzles for Wiggins system
Motor Adapter Housing
(4) Oil level gauge and filler opening. This opening can also be used for connecting a
suction pump when changing the oil.
(5) Breather filter
(6) Oil drain plug
Swing Gears, change oil:
1. Use adequate working platform for draining the oil. Place

receptacles of sufficient capacity (approx. 100 liter) below
drain couplings (10). Attach drain hose (part of tool set) to
drain coupling (10). Remove parts (1, 2 and 3) to speed up
draining. On swing gears with evacuation nozzle (10), use the
Wiggins system for changing the oil.
2. Clean breather filter (3) with compressed air from inside to

outside and re-install.
3. After the oil is completely drained, flush the gear with the reg-
ular gear oil.
4. Remove drain hose from coupling (10) and attach the protec-
tion cap onto the drain coupling.
5. Fill gear housing through filler opening (2) up to the "MAX"

mark on level gauge (1) with fresh oil and re-install plug (2).
NOTICE
For checking the oil level insert the level gauge (1) but
DO NOT screw in, see detail (A).
6. After short operating period check oil level and housings for
leaks.
469
470
Motor Adapter Housing, Change Oil:
1. Remove level gauge (4) and breather filter (5). Insert the hose
of a suction pump into the gauge pipe (4) until the hose end
just touches the bottom of the T-union. Place the oil outlet
hose of the suction pump into a receptacle. Switch on the
pump and completely suck off the oil from the motor housing.
If a suction pump is not available, place a receptacle below
drain plug (6).
Remove plug (6) and drain the oil completely.

3. If removed, install drain plug (6) and fill-up gear oil through
filler opening (4), up to the "MAX" mark on level gauge (4)
and install the level gauge.
4. After short operating period check oil level and housing for
leaks.
471
472
SWING GEAR MANUFACTURED BY

"SIEBENHAAR"
(1) Swing gear (RH and LH)
(2) Brake housing
(3) Compensator oil tank for swing gear

(4) Oil level gauge for swing gear
(5) Oil drain plug for motor adapter housing
(6) Oil level gauge for motor adapter housing

(7) Breather filter for brake housing
(8) Oil level gauge for brake housing
(9) Oil drain plug for brake housing
(11) Drain coupling or evacuation nozzle for Wiggins sys-

tem
SWING GEAR - CHANGE OIL (SIEBENHAAR)
1. Use adequate working platform for draining the oil. Place

receptacles of sufficient capacity (approx. 100 liter) below
each drain coupling (11). Attach drain hose (part of tool set) to
drain coupling (11). Remove parts (4 and 10) to speed up
draining.

ular gear oil.
4. Remove drain hose from coupling (11) and attach the protec-
tion cap onto the drain coupling.
5. Fill gear housing through filler opening up to the "MAX" mark

on level gauge (4) with fresh oil and re-install oil filler plug.
NOTICE
For checking the oil level insert the level gauge (4) but
DO NOT screw in, see detail (A).
6. After short operating period check oil level and housings for
leaks.
473
474
Brake Housing - Change Oil (Siebenhaar)
1. Remove level gauge (8), illustration Z24091, drain plug (9)

and breather filter (7). Drain the oil into a receptacle of
approx. 5 liter capacity.

3. Install drain plug (9) and fill-up engine or hydraulic oil through
filler opening, up to the "MAX" mark on level gauge (8) and
install the level gauge.
leaks.
NOTICE
Be sure to fill the brake housing and motor adapter housing
with engine oil or hydraulic oil as specified on page 299.
Motor Adapter Housing - Change Oil
1. Remove level gauge (6) and drain plug (5). Drain the oil into a
receptacle of approx. 5 liter capacity.
2. Install drain plug (5) and fill-up engine or hydraulic oil through
filler opening, up to the "MAX" mark on level gauge (6) and
install the level gauge.
leaks.
475
476
4.14.2 TRAVEL GEARS, MOTOR ADAPTER HOUSINGS AND FINAL DRIVES

CHANGE OIL

(1) Travel gear
(2) Oil level gauge
(3) Oil filler plug
(4) Oil drain plug

(5) Connector for breather filter line. The breather filter
is located inside the center frame, see illustration
Z25243 on page 341.
(6) Travel brake housing

REMARK
The travel gear brakes are dry type multiple disk
brakes. DO NOT fill the housings with oil.
(7) Motor adapter housing
(8) Oil level plug

Z25243 on page 341. The port of connector (9) is
also used as oil filler opening.
(10) Oil drain plug
(11) Hydraulic motors
(12) Final drive housing contains the lubricating oil

for sprocket bearing lubrication.
(13) Oil level gauge
(14) Oil filler plug
(15) Oil drain plug

Z25243 on page 341.
477
478
TRAVEL GEARS - CHANGE OIL
Illustration Z25244:
REMARK
The breather filters for the travel gears are mounted inside
the center frame and connected with extension hoses.
1. Remove drain plugs (4), filler plug (3) and oil level gauge (2).
Check breather filter, mounted inside center frame, and clean
as necessary.
ular gear oil and reinstall drain plugs (4).
3. Fill the gear with fresh oil through filler opening (3) up to the
Max mark on oil level gauge (2).
4. Install filler plug (3) and gauge (2).
5. After short operating period check gears for leakage.
MOTOR ADAPTER HOUSINGS - CHANGE OIL
1. Remove parts (8, 9 and 10) and drain the oil completely.
2. Check breather filter, mounted inside center frame, and clean

as necessary.
3. Install drain plug (10) and fill-up oil to level opening (8).
Reconnect breather filter hose line to filler opening (9).
FINAL DRIVE HOUSINGS - CHANGE OIL
1. Remove drain plug (15), filler plug (14) and oil level gauge
(13) and drain the lubricating oil.
2. Check breather filter mounted inside center frame, and clean

as necessary.
3. After the oil is completely drained, install the cleaned drain

plug (15) and tighten securely.
4. Fill in new oil up to the “MAX” marking on oil level gauge (13).
5. Clean filler plug (14) and reinstall.
6. Insert oil level gauge (13) and tighten securely.
7. After short operating period check oil level and gear for leak-
age.
479
480
4.14.3 PTO (PUMP DISTRIBUTOR GEAR) - CHANGE OIL
(1) Oil level gauge
(2) Oil filler plug
(3) Breather filter
(4) Oil drain plug
(7) Oil collector reservoir for adapter housings of

hydraulic pumps for fan drives of radiator and
hydraulic oil coolers
(8) Breather filter with oil level gauge
(9) Adapter housings for main hydraulic pumps
(10) Oil level plug

(11) Oil filler plug with breather pipe
(12) Oil drain plug
Gear Oil Viscosity
Select gear oil viscosity grade according to ambient tempera-

tures.
If the new gear oil has a different viscosity grade compared with
the drained oil it is necessary to enter the new viscosity grade into
the appropriate ”Excavator Components” group.
Refer to page 86 for the INPUT procedure of the oil viscosity.
NOTICE
Before opening the access covers from below the pump dis-
tributor gears provide an adequate working platform with
sufficient space for the oil collecting container (approx. 200
liters for both gears).
481
482
Change the Oil
1. Remove drain plug (4).
2. Remove gauge (1) and filler plug (2).
3. Remove breather filter (3), blow out with compressed air from
inside to outside and re-install.
ular gear oil and reinstall drain plug (4).
5. Fill in new oil through opening (2) up to the “MAX” mark on

gauge (1). If the machine is equipped with a central refilling
system, proceed according to page 276.
6. Re-install parts (1 and 2).
7. After short operating period, check oil level and housing for
leakage.
NOTICE
If the oil level is above the "MAX" mark, drain the oil down
until the oil level is at the "MAX" mark. Too much oil in the
pump distributor gear will cause aeration of the oil.
483
4.15 FIRE PREVENTION MAINTENANCE
4.15 FIRE PREVENTION
484
MAINTENANCE 4.15 FIRE PREVENTION
PRECAUTIONS
In order to prevent risks of possible fire break out observe the fol-
lowing items:
1. Keep the excavator clean, especially from inflammable mate-

rials.
Clean the excavator after servicing the hydraulic system by
means of a steam jet.
2. Clean motor compartment, hydraulic pump compartment and

service platform of the superstructure.
Thereafter check hydraulic oil lines for leakage, loose fasten-
ings and damage.
If any leakage, damage or loose fastening is found, corrective
action must be taken immediately.
3. Check all electrical cables, terminals and connections for

loose fastenings, damage and wear.
Replace or repair defective or worn parts without delay.
4. Check the turbocharger for correct mounting and tight

exhaust, intake and lube oil connections.
Carry out all necessary repairs without delay.
5. On machines equipped with a fire detection, actuation

and suppression system:
Refer to the manufacturers service manuals filed in Service
Literature Binder Volume 2 for correct maintenance and
inspection of the systems.
When checking the filling level of the dry chemical tanks,
make sure that the extinguishing powder (Ansul FORAY dry
chemical agent) is not compacted.
Stir up the extinguishing powder with a suitable stick until it is
in a free flowing condition.
NOTICE
When cleaning the power house take care the heat detection
sensors do not come in contact with hot steam or other hot
agent. Otherwise the fire suppression system may be trig-
gered.
6. Make sure fire extinguishers are charged and ready for use.
NOTICE
After cleaning lubricate all lubrication points by means of
central lube system or manually.
Lubricate swing circle gear after drying by means of the
automatic lube system or manually.
485
4.16 WELD REPAIRS MAINTENANCE
4.16 WELD REPAIRS
CAUTION
Before carry out weld repairs, contact our Service Depart-
ment EXCAVATORS in order to avoid improper welding pro-
cedures. Weld repairs can cause severe damage to an entire
structure if performed incorrectly. If cracks are found in the
steel construction of your excavator, please inform our Ser-
vice Department as soon as possible. Attach suitable infor-
mation material (photos, catalog drawings etc.) showing the
location and nature of the crack.
486
MAINTENANCE 4.16 WELD REPAIRS
GENERAL INFORMATION
Welding operations can cause damage to electronic components.

(Computers, Control Units, Sensors etc.), in case the welding cur-
rent goes through these units. Therefore protective measures are
necessary before any weld repair is started.
GENERAL PROTECTIVE MEASURES
A. Observe the prevailing safety and fire prevention

regulations.
Before any weld repair is started, a survey should be

made of the area and all safety considerations satis-
fied such as fuel tanks, oil lines, electrical cables and
synthetic materials.
B. Attach the welding ground directly to the part that is

being repaired. Do not allow welding current to go
through bearings. Welding current could arc the
bearings, resulting in severe damage to the bearing.
WELD REPAIRS ON MAJOR COMPONENTS OF

THE EXCAVATOR
COUNTERWEIGHT
WARNING
The chambers of the counterweight are filled with a mixture
of concrete, granulated ore and steel pellets. This mixture
can create explosive gases which will accumulate in the
chambers of the counterweight. Before any welding, flame-
cutting, grinding or drilling procedures are carried out on the
counterweight it is vital to expel these gases from the coun-
terweight chambers. Failure to properly expel the gases from
the counterweight chambers can result in an explosion with
chambers.
(1) Undercarriage, refer to page 489 for protective mea-

sures.
(2) Loader attachment, refer to page 491 for protective

measures.
(3) Superstructure, refer to page 493 for protective mea-

sures.
487
488
4.16.1 PROTECTIVE MEASURES BEFORE STARTING WELD REPAIRS ON

THE UNDERCARRIAGE
On standard Excavators there are no special protective measures

necessary.
However, the general protective measures (A and B) must be
observed.
On Excavators with a power unit (generator set) mounted to the
undercarriage, all electrical connections between the Excavator
and the power unit have to be disconnected.
489
490

THE LOADER ATTACHMENT
(1) Electrical cable connector of the end-line pressure

switch for the central lubrication system
(2) Plug socket
(3) Protection cap for (2)
(4) Protection cap for (1)
(5) Switch box of the electronic bucket levelling system

”EBL”, (Special Equipment)
(6) Bucket position detector box for the ”EBL” system

(Special Equipment)
NOTICE
If weld repairs have to be carried out on the Loader Attach-
ment (Bucket, Stick and/or Boom) disconnect the end line
pressure switch cable connector (1) from socket (2) and
close the openings with caps (3 and 4).
If the Excavator is equipped with an electronic Bucket Level-
ling System, disconnect also the cable connector on switch
box (5).
Be sure to disconnect electrical connections of working
lights and other electrical equipment mounted on the loader
attachment.
491
492

THE SUPERSTRUCTURE
WARNING
Weld repair procedures on the superstructure require special
preventive measures to avoid damage to electric and elec-
tronic components. Isolation of the electrical and electronic
systems of the shovel has to be carried out by authorized
Electricians with special knowledge of the equipment. The
weld repair job should be carried out by skilled welders only.
It is advisable to contact your local Komatsu Service Station
for support prior to start weld repairs on the superstructure.
● Switch of battery main switches.
Components in the cab base, illustration Z 22671
1. Switch off all circuit breakers (1) on switch board "X2".
2. Disconnect all plugs on the programmable logic controller (2).
3. Remove the wiring harness connector (3) from electronic

pump control module (E32).
4.16.4 AFTER FINISHING THE REPAIR WELDINGS ON THE

SUPERSTRUCTURE
After finishing the weld repairs connect all cable connectors which
have been disconnected. Switch on all circuit breakers.
When all electrical connections are established insert the battery
main switch keys.
493
494
1. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................... 3
1.1 CONTENTS OF THE BINDER ........................................................................................................... 4
1.2 DIVISION OF THE BINDER ............................................................................................................... 5
1.3 DESIGNATED USE OF THE SHOVEL .............................................................................................. 6
1.4 DELIVERY OF THE SHOVEL ............................................................................................................ 7
1.5 EXPLANATION OF ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................................................. 8
1.6 TABLE OF CONTENTS ..................................................................................................................... 9
2. SAFETY ...................................................................................................... 15
2.1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................................................................ 16
2.1.1 WARNINGS AND SYMBOLS .............................................................................................. 16
2.1.2 BASIC OPERATION AND DESIGNATED USE OF THE HYDRAULIC SHOVEL ............... 16
2.1.3 ORGANIZATIONAL MEASURES ....................................................................................... 17
2.1.4 SELECTION AND QUALIFICATION OF PERSONNEL - BASIC RESPONSIBILITIES ...... 19
2.1.5 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS GOVERNING SPECIFIC OPERATIONAL PHASES ................ 20
2.1.6 WARNING OF SPECIAL DANGERS .................................................................................. 23
2.1.7 TRANSPORTING AND TOWING -RECOMMISSIONING .................................................. 25
2.1.8 SPECIAL SAFETY EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................ 25
2.1.9 SAFETY HARNESS IN CONFORMITY WITH EN 361 (EUROPEAN STANDARD) ........... 29
3. OPERATION ............................................................................................... 37
3.1 FOREWORD .................................................................................................................................... 38
3.2 CONSTRUCTION OF THE SHOVEL ............................................................................................... 39

3.2.1 OVERALL VIEW .................................................................................................................. 39
3.2.2 UNDERCARRIAGE AND SUPERSTRUCTURE ................................................................. 40
3.2.3 UNDERCARRIAGE ............................................................................................................. 46
3.2.4 HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED ACCESS LADDER ........................................................... 48
3.2.5 EMERGENCY ESCAPE LADDER ...................................................................................... 52
3.2.6 EMERGENCY MOTOR SHUTDOWN FROM GROUND MAN OR OPERATOR WARNING
SYSTEM .............................................................................................................................. 54
3.2.7 OPERATOR’S CAB WITH INTEGRATED FALLING OBJECT PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE
(FOPS) ................................................................................................................................ 56
3.3 OPERATOR’S CAB - CONTROLS .................................................................................................. 66

3.3.1 CONTROLS WITH BACKHOE ATTACHMENT .................................................................. 66
3.3.2 CONTROLS WITH BOTTOM DUMP BUCKET ATTACHMENT ......................................... 70
3.3.3 OPERATOR’S CONSOLE .................................................................................................. 75
3.3.4 CONTROL UNITS FOR FIRE DETECTION, ACTUATION AND SUPPRESSION SYSTEM .
85
495
3.4 ELECTRONIC MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM ECS ...................................................... 86
3.4.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................. 87
3.4.2 OPERATING THE ELECTRONIC MONITORING SYSTEM ............................................... 95
3.4.3 AUTOMATIC DISPLAY OF MESSAGES ............................................................................ 99
3.4.4 MENU CONTROL AND SERVICE FUNCTIONS .............................................................. 123
3.4.5 MENU CONTROL LIST ..................................................................................................... 148
3.4.6 FAULT AND INFORMATION MESSAGE LIST ................................................................. 165
3.5 CAMERA SYSTEM WITH MONITOR ............................................................................................ 190

3.5.1 LOCATION OF MONITOR AND CONTROL UNIT ............................................................ 191
3.6 OPERATING THE HEATER, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING ..................................... 198
3.7 MACHINERY HOUSE .................................................................................................................... 200

3.7.1 EMERGENCY MOTOR SHUTDOWN SWITCHES ........................................................... 201
3.7.2 SAFETY SWITCH FOR MAINTENANCE .......................................................................... 203
3.7.3 CONTROL AND FILTER PANEL OF REAR- AND FRONT POWER UNIT ...................... 205
3.8 MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCH CABINET IN CAB BASE .............................................................. 206

3.8.1 COMPONENTS OF THE MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCH CABINET ................................. 207
3.8.2 SWITCH BOARD (X2) IN CAB BASE ............................................................................... 209
3.8.3 MONITOR AND CONTROL PANEL IN CAB BASE .......................................................... 219
3.8.4 SWITCH BOARD - MEDIUM VOLTAGE ........................................................................... 221
3.9 HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCH CABINET ............................................................................................ 222
3.10 CHECKS BEFORE STARTING THE MAIN DRIVE MOTORS ...................................................... 224
3.11 STARTING THE MAIN DRIVE MOTORS ...................................................................................... 228
3.12 MOVING THE SHOVEL ................................................................................................................. 235

3.12.1 TRAVEL CONTROL WITH FOOT PEDALS ...................................................................... 235
3.12.2 TRAVELLING INSTRUCTIONS ........................................................................................ 238
3.13 SLEWING AND BRAKING THE SUPERSTRUCTURE ................................................................. 239

3.13.1 SLEWING THE SUPERSTRUCTURE .............................................................................. 239
3.14 WORKING WITH THE ATTACHMENT .......................................................................................... 242

3.14.1 MACHINES EQUIPPED WITH ”EURO” CONTROL SYSTEM .......................................... 242
3.14.2 MACHINES EQUIPPED WITH ”KMG” CONTROL SYSTEM ............................................ 243
3.14.3 BOTTOM DUMP BUCKET ................................................................................................ 244
3.14.4 DROP BALL OPERATION ................................................................................................ 245
3.14.5 COMBINED OPERATION CYCLES .................................................................................. 248
3.15 WORKING INSTRUCTIONS .......................................................................................................... 250

3.15.1 STABILITY OF THE SHOVEL ........................................................................................... 250
3.15.2 SHOVEL OPERATION ...................................................................................................... 250
3.16 PARKING THE SHOVEL ............................................................................................................... 253
3.17 STOPPING THE MAIN DRIVE MOTORS ...................................................................................... 254

3.17.1 RELIEVE PRESSURE IN THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM .................................................... 257
496
3.18 OPERATION OF THE LUBRICATION SYSTEM ........................................................................... 258
3.18.1 CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM -CLS- FOR SUPERSTRUCTURE AND ATTACHMENT
258
3.18.2 SWING CIRCLE PINION LUBRICATION SYSTEM ”SLS” ............................................... 260
3.19 FIRE DETECTION, ACTUATION AND SUPPRESSION SYSTEM ............................................... 262

3.19.1 CONTROL UNITS FOR THE FIRE DETECTION, ACTUATION AND SUPPRESSION
SYSTEMS ......................................................................................................................... 263
3.19.2 REMOTE HIGH LEVEL ALARM *FIRE* LOCATED ON THE CAB .................................. 267
3.19.3 ACTUATION MODES OF THE FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM: .................................... 267
3.19.4 IN CASE OF FIRE ............................................................................................................. 269
3.20 TRANSFER PUMP FOR HYDRAULIC OIL ................................................................................... 270

3.20.1 OPERATING THE TRANSFER PUMP ............................................................................. 271
3.20.2 FUNCTIONS OF THE TRANSFER PUMP ....................................................................... 273
3.21 CENTRAL REFILLING SYSTEM ................................................................................................... 276

3.21.1 SYSTEMS CONNECTED TO THE REFILLING SYSTEM ................................................ 277
3.21.2 REFILLABLE GREASE CONTAINERS OF THE AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS ...
281
3.22 SERVICE CRANE (SPECIAL EQUIPMENT) ................................................................................. 282

3.22.1 OPERATING THE CRANE ............................................................................................... 283
3.23 WORK ON THE LOADER ATTACHMENT .................................................................................... 286

SHOVEL ......................................................................................................................................... 287
3.24.1 DISASSEMBLING OF THE SHOVEL ............................................................................... 287
3.24.2 TRANSPORTATION AND LIFTING .................................................................................. 287
3.25 RETRIEVAL PROCEDURE ........................................................................................................... 288
3.26 SHOVEL STORAGE ...................................................................................................................... 289

3.26.1 PREPARING FOR STORAGE .......................................................................................... 289
3.26.2 ONE MONTH REPETITIVE SERVICE PERIOD ............................................................... 289
3.26.3 SIX MONTH REPETITIVE SERVICE PERIOD ................................................................. 290
3.26.4 PREPARING FOR OPERATION ...................................................................................... 290
3.27 TROUBLE SHOOTING .................................................................................................................. 291

3.27.1 MAIN DRIVE ELECTRIC MOTOR .................................................................................... 291
3.27.2 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM ...................................................................................................... 292
3.27.3 FINAL DRIVES AND SWING GEAR ................................................................................. 293
3.27.4 CRAWLER TRACKS ......................................................................................................... 293
4. MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................ 295
497
4.1 FOREWORD .................................................................................................................................. 296
4.2 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................... 297
4.3 FUEL AND LUBRICANTS ............................................................................................................. 299
4.4 FILLING CAPACITIES ................................................................................................................... 303
4.5 STANDARD TORQUE LIST .......................................................................................................... 304
4.6 LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ...................................................................... 305

4.6.1 INITIAL SERVICING .......................................................................................................... 305
4.6.2 PERIODIC SERVICING INTERVALS ............................................................................... 305
4.6.3 PERIODIC SERVICING SCHEDULE ................................................................................ 306
4.6.4 MAINTENANCE OF THE MAIN DRIVE MOTORS ........................................................... 309
4.7 WHEN NECESSARY ..................................................................................................................... 312

4.7.1 SWING CIRCLE TOOTHING LUBRICATION ................................................................... 313
4.7.2 AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS FILL GREASE CONTAINERS ......................... 315
4.7.3 TRACK ROLLERS AND GUIDE WHEELS - REPLACE FLOATING SEALS .................... 319
4.8 EVERY 10 OPERATING HOURS OR DAILY ................................................................................ 320

4.8.1 WALK - AROUND INSPECTION ....................................................................................... 321
4.8.2 TRACK GROUPS - CLEAN ............................................................................................... 331
4.9 EVERY 50 OPERATING HOURS OR WEEKLY ........................................................................... 332

4.9.1 SWING GEARS AND MOTOR ADAPTER HOUSINGS - CHECK OIL LEVELS .............. 333
4.9.2 TRAVEL GEARS, MOTOR ADAPTER HOUSINGS AND FINAL DRIVES CHECK OIL
LEVELS ............................................................................................................................. 337
4.9.3 PTO’s (PUMP DISTRIBUTOR GEARS) AND OIL RESERVOIR - CHECK OIL LEVEL ... 343
4.9.4 HYDRAULIC ACCESS LADDER - CHECK SAFETY SENSOR ....................................... 347
4.9.5 HYDRAULIC OIL COOLERS - INSPECT AND CLEAN IF NECESSARY ......................... 349
4.10 EVERY 250 OPERATING HOURS OR MONTHLY ....................................................................... 350

4.10.1 SIGNAL HORN COMPRESSOR - LUBRICATE ............................................................... 351
4.10.2 HYDRAULIC OIL COOLER FAN BEARINGS - CHECK FOR LEAKAGE AND CLEAN
BREATHER FILTER .......................................................................................................... 351
4.10.3 RADIATOR FAN BEARINGS - CHECK FOR LEAKAGE AND CLEAN BREATHER FILTER
(DIESEL VERSION ONLY) ............................................................................................... 351
4.10.4 AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEMS - CLEAN IN-LINE GREASE FILTER AND CHECK
BREATHER FILTER .......................................................................................................... 353
4.10.5 CAB AIR CLEANER - CLEAN OR REPLACE FILTER ELEMENT ................................... 355
4.10.6 AIR CONDITIONING FOR OPERATOR’S CAB AND SWITCH CABINETS ..................... 357
4.10.7 WINDSHIELD WASHER SYSTEM - CHECK FLUID LEVEL ............................................ 361
4.11 EVERY 500 OPERATING HOURS OR QUARTERLY .................................................................. 362

4.11.1 BATTERIES - CHECK FLUID LEVEL ............................................................................... 363
4.11.2 CRAWLER TRACK - INSPECTION .................................................................................. 365
4.12 EVERY 1000 OPERATING HOURS OR EVERY 6 MONTH ......................................................... 370

4.12.1 HIGH STRENGTH BOLT CONNECTIONS - CHECK TORQUE LOAD ............................ 371
4.12.2 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM - FILTER SERVICE ...................................................................... 427
498
4.12.3 PTO’S (PUMP DISTRIBUTOR GEARS), SWING GEARS AND TRAVEL GEARS - OIL
SAMPLE ANALYSIS ......................................................................................................... 441
4.12.4 SIGNAL HORN COMPRESSOR - CLEAN AND LUBRICATE .......................................... 443
4.12.5 HYDRAULIC TRACK TENSIONING SYSTEM - CHECK PRESSURE ACCUMULATORS ....
445
4.12.6 WATER FILTER - REPLACE FILTER CARTRIDGE ........................................................ 447
4.12.7 HYDRAULIC OIL COOLER - INSPECT AND LUBRICATE DOOR HINGES .................... 449
4.12.8 MACHINERY HOUSE DOORS - INSPECT AND LUBRICATE DOOR HINGES .............. 451
4.12.9 SLIP RING UNIT - LUBRICATE ........................................................................................ 453
4.13 EVERY 2000 OPERATING HOURS OR YEARLY ........................................................................ 454

4.13.1 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM - CHANGE OIL, REPLACE SUCTION STRAINERS AND
PULSATION DAMPER ...................................................................................................... 455
4.13.2 EMERGENCY ESCAPE LADDER - INSPECTION ........................................................... 467
4.14 EVERY 3000 OPERATING HOURS HOWEVER AT LEAST ONCE A YEAR .............................. 468
4.14.1 SWING GEARS AND MOTOR ADAPTER HOUSING - CHANGE OIL ............................. 469
4.14.2 TRAVEL GEARS, MOTOR ADAPTER HOUSINGS AND FINAL DRIVES CHANGE OIL 477
4.14.3 PTO (PUMP DISTRIBUTOR GEAR) - CHANGE OIL ....................................................... 481
4.15 FIRE PREVENTION ....................................................................................................................... 484
4.16 WELD REPAIRS ............................................................................................................................ 486

UNDERCARRIAGE ........................................................................................................... 489
4.16.2 PROTECTIVE MEASURES BEFORE STARTING WELD REPAIRS ON THE LOADER
ATTACHMENT .................................................................................................................. 491
SUPERSTRUCTURE ........................................................................................................ 493
4.16.4 AFTER FINISHING THE REPAIR WELDINGS ON THE SUPERSTRUCTURE ............... 493
499

Pc5500-6e Om&mm - 15044

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pc5500-6e Om&mm - 15044

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pc5500-6e Om&mm - 15044

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operation & Maintenance

1.1 CONTENTS OF THE BINDER

1.2 DIVISION OF THE BINDER

Refer to the "TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 2 BINDER"

Read the Manuals before You Start the Engines.

Before operating the machine, familiarize yourself with its instru-

Observe the instructions in these manuals for:

● your Personal SAFETY

● Operating SAFETY, and

● READY and EFFICIENT PERFORMANCE of your

Periodic preventive inspections and maintenance are the surest

Replace damaged graphics and symbols.

Observe safety precautions to prevent injury and damage.

If you have any questions concerning this literature please con-

Komatsu Mining Germany GmbH

1.3 DESIGNATED USE OF THE SHOVEL

The machine must only be used in technically perfect condition in

The hydraulic Shovel is designed exclusively for excavating, i.e.

1.4 DELIVERY OF THE SHOVEL

For assembling the Shovel refer to the separate Manual

If there are any questions concerning the assembling procedure,

Damages and defects caused by incorrect operation and mainte-

For your spare part orders refer to the Parts Catalogue.

In order to keep your Shovel in first-class operating condition use

KOMATSU MINING GERMANY GmbH from any guarantee.

In all your written or phoned inquiries please indicate the model

1.5 EXPLANATION OF ABBREVIATIONS

API American Petroleum Institute

CLS Central Lubrication System

DIN German Institute for Standardization

EBL Electronic Bucket Levelling System

ECM Electronic Control Module

ECS Electronic Control and Monitoring System

EF Earth Fault Protection Switch

FGPS Front Guard Protective Structure

FOPS Falling-Object Protective Structure

LED Light Emitting Diode

M1 Rear motor on counterweight side designated as motor 1

M2 Front motor on operator’s cab side designated as motor 2

ppm parts per million

SLS Swing circle pinion Lubrication System

1/min Revolutions Per Minute (RPM)

1.6 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.2 DIVISION OF THE BINDER ............................................................................................................... 5

1.3 DESIGNATED USE OF THE SHOVEL .............................................................................................. 6

1.4 DELIVERY OF THE SHOVEL ............................................................................................................ 7

1.5 EXPLANATION OF ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................................................. 8

1.6 TABLE OF CONTENTS ..................................................................................................................... 9

3.2 CONSTRUCTION OF THE SHOVEL ............................................................................................... 39

3.3 OPERATOR’S CAB - CONTROLS .................................................................................................. 66

3.3.3 OPERATOR’S CONSOLE ................................................................................................... 75

3.4 ELECTRONIC MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM ECS ...................................................... 86

3.5 CAMERA SYSTEM WITH MONITOR ............................................................................................ 189

3.7 MACHINERY HOUSE .................................................................................................................... 199

3.8 MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCH CABINET IN CAB BASE .............................................................. 205

3.9 HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCH CABINET ............................................................................................ 225

3.11 STARTING THE MAIN DRIVE MOTORS ...................................................................................... 231